Dell All in One Printer 2145cn User Manual

Dell 2145cn  
Multi Functional Printer  
User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FEATURES BY MODEL  
The printer is designed to support all of your document needs – from printing and copying, to more advanced networking solutions for your business.  
Basic features of this printer include:  
FEATURES  
Dell 2145cn  
USB 2.0  
 
USB Memory Interface  
 
 
O
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)  
Hard Disk (optional)  
Network Interface Enthernet 10/100 Base TX wired LAN  
Duplex (2-sided) printing  
 
 
 
FAX  
( : Included, O: Optional)  
ABOUT THIS USER’S GUIDE  
This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the printer as well as detailed explanation on each step during the actual usage. Both novice  
users and professional users can refer to this guide for installing and using the printer.  
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:  
Document is synonymous with original.  
Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.  
Following table offers the conventions of this guide:  
CONVENTION  
DESCRIPTION  
EXAMPLE  
Bold  
Note  
Used for texts on the display or actual prints on the printer.  
Start  
Used to provide additional information or detailed specification of the printer  
function and feature.  
The date format may differ from  
country to country  
Caution  
Used to give users information to protect the printer from possible mechanical  
damage or malfunction.  
Do not touch the green underside of  
the toner cartridge.  
Footnote  
Used to provide more detailed information on certain words or a phrase.  
a. pages per minute  
(See page 1 for more  
information)  
Used to guide users to the reference page for the additional detailed information. (See page 1 for more information)  
Features of your new laser printer | 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FINDING MORE INFORMATION  
You can find information for setting up and using your printer from the following resources, either as a print-out or onscreen.  
Quick Install Guide  
Provides information on setting up your printer and this requires that you follow the instructions in the guide to prepare the printer.  
Online User’s Guide  
Printer Driver Help  
Provides you with step-by-step instructions for using your printer’s full features, and contains information for maintaining your printer,  
troubleshooting, and installing accessories.  
This user’s guide also contains a Software section to provide you with information on how to print documents with your printer in  
various operating systems, and how to use the included software utilities.  
You can access the user’s guide in other languages from the Manual folder on the printer software CD.  
Provides you with help information on printer driver properties and instructions for setting up the properties for printing. To access a  
printer driver help screen, click Help from the printer properties dialog box.  
Dell website  
If you have Internet access, you can get help, support, printer drivers, manuals, and order information from the Dell websites  
4 | Features of your new laser printer  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
safety information  
IMPORTANT SAFETY SYMBOLS AND PRECAUTIONS  
What the icons and signs in this user’s guide mean:  
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death.  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage.  
To reduce the risk of fire, explosion, electric shock, or personal injury when using your laser Multi-Function Printer (MFP),  
follow these basic safety precautions:  
Do NOT attempt.  
Do NOT disassemble.  
Do NOT touch.  
Follow directions explicitly.  
Unplug the power plug from the wall socket.  
Ensure the MFP is grounded to prevent electric shock.  
Call the service center for help.  
These warning signs are here to prevent injury to you and others. Follow them explicitly. After reading this section, keep it in a safe  
place for future reference.  
1. Read and understand all instructions.  
2. Use common sense whenever operating electrical appliances.  
3. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the printer and in the literature accompanying the printer.  
4. If an operating instruction appears to conflict with safety information, heed the safety information. You may have misunderstood the  
operating instruction. If you cannot resolve the conflict, contact your sales or service representative for assistance.  
5. Unplug the printer from the AC wall socket and/or telephone jack before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use only a  
damp cloth for cleaning.  
6. Do not place the printer on an unstable cart, stand or table. It may fall, causing serious damage.  
7. Your printer should never be placed on, near or over a radiator, heater, air conditioner, or ventilation duct.  
8. Do not allow anything to rest on the power. Do not place your printer where the cords will be abused by persons walking on them.  
9. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords. This can diminish performance, and may result in the risk of fire or electric shock.  
10. Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone, or computer interface cords.  
11. Never push objects of any kind into the printer through case or cabinet openings. They may touch dangerous voltage points, creating  
a risk of fire or shock. Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the printer.  
12. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble the printer. Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is  
required. Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly could cause  
electric shock when the unit is subsequently used.  
Safety information | 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
13. Unplug the printer from the telephone jack, computer and AC wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the  
following conditions:  
When any part of the power cord, plug or connecting cable is damaged or frayed.  
If liquid has been spilled into the printer.  
If the printer has been exposed to rain or water.  
If the printer does not operate properly after instructions have been followed.  
If the printer has been dropped, or the cabinet appears damaged.  
If the printer exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance.  
14. Adjust only those controls covered by the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage, and  
may require extensive work by a qualified service technician to restore the printer to normal operation.  
15. Avoid using this printer during a lightning storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. If possible, unplug the  
AC power and telephone cord for the duration of the lightning storm.  
16. The Power cord supplied with your printer should be used for safe operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 m with  
a
110 V printer, then it should be 16 AWG or bigger.  
17. Use only No.26 AWG or larger telephone line cord.  
18. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS  
19. This printer can be operated only in the country you have purchased (due to different voltage, frequency, telecommunication  
configuration and etc.).  
a. AWG: American Wire Gauge  
6 | Safety information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
contents  
Contents | 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
contents  
Darkness  
8 | Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
contents  
60 Clearing the Toner Empty message  
Contents | 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
contents  
62 To access Embedded Web Service:  
File policy  
10 | Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
contents  
Contents | 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
introduction  
These are the main components of your printer:  
This chapter includes:  
PRINTER OVERVIEW  
Front view  
Rear view  
USB port  
Power switch  
1
2
7
8
Network connector  
Power connector  
15-pin optional tray  
connection  
Control board cover  
Rear cover  
3
4
5
9
Telephone line socket  
10  
11  
Extension telephone socket  
(EXT)  
Cable organizer  
Document width guides  
DADF  
USB connector  
1
2
3
12  
13  
14  
Handle  
6
Paper level indicator  
Optional tray 2  
Control panel  
Multi-purpose tray paper  
width guides  
Output support  
4
15  
Front cover  
Toner cartridge  
Paper transfer belt  
Scanner lid  
5
6
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
Front cover handle  
Multi-purpose tray handle  
7
Multi-purpose tray  
Tray 1  
Scanner lock switch  
Scanner glass  
8
9
Document input tray  
Document output tray  
Scan unit  
10  
11  
12 | Introduction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
CONTROL PANEL OVERVIEW  
Selects the document type for the current copy  
h
Original Type (  
ID Copy (  
)
17  
18  
Allows you to store frequently-dialed fax  
Speed buttons  
Shift  
numbers and enter them with the touch of a few  
buttons.  
1
2
3
You can copy both sides of an ID card (e.g.,  
driver's license) to a single side of paper (see  
)
Allows you to shift the speed buttons to access  
numbers 16 through 30.  
Allows you to store frequently used fax numbers  
in memory or search for stored fax numbers or  
email addresses.  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Makes a copy smaller or larger than the original.  
19  
20  
Address Book (  
)
(
)
Allows you to print documents on both sides of  
the paper.  
Adjusts the document resolution for the current  
fax job.  
Duplex ( )  
Y
X
4
5
Resolution (  
)
Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB  
Memory device when it is inserted into the USB  
In Ready mode, redials the last number, or in  
Edit mode, inserts a pause into a fax number.  
Redial/Pause (  
)
USB Print (  
)
21  
22  
Activates Fax mode.  
Activates Copy mode.  
Activates Scan mode.  
6
7
8
Fax  
(
)
Number keypad  
Copy  
(
)
Scan/Email  
Display  
(
)
Engages the telephone line.  
23 On Hook Dial (  
24 Stop/Clear (  
)
)
Shows the current status and prompts during an  
operation.  
Stops an operation at any time. In Ready mode,  
clears/cancels the copy options, such as the  
darkness, the document type setting, the copy  
size, and the number of copies.  
9
)
The toner colors shown below the LCD display co-  
works with the display messages (see Status LED  
with the toner cartridge messages on page 14).  
Toner colors  
10  
11  
12  
Starts a job in Color mode.  
25  
26  
Color Start (  
Black Start (  
Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the  
available menus.  
Menu (  
)
Starts a job in Black and White mode.  
)
Scroll through the options available in the  
selected menu, and increase or decrease  
values.  
Left/right arrow  
All illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your printer  
depending on its options or model.  
The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large  
number of pages at once. Ensure that you do not touch the  
surface, and do not allow children near it.  
OK  
(
)
Confirms the selection on the screen.  
Sends you back to the upper menu level.  
13  
14  
Back (  
)
Status (  
Darkness (  
)
)
15  
16  
Adjusts the document brightness for the current  
Introduction | 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
UNDERSTANDING THE STATUS LED  
ACKNOWLEDGING THE STATUS OF THE  
TONER CARTRIDGE  
The color of the Status (  
) LED indicates the printer's current status.  
The status of toner cartridges is indicated by the Status (  
) LED and  
the LCD display. If the toner cartridge is low or needs to be replaced, the  
STATUS  
DESCRIPTION  
Status (  
) LED turns red and the display shows the message. However  
the arrow mark shows which color toner is of concern or needs replacement  
with a new cartridge.  
Off  
The printer is powered off-line.  
The printer is in power save mode. When data is  
received, or any button is pressed, it switches to  
on-line automatically.  
Example:  
Green Blinking  
When the green LED blinks slowly, the printer is  
receiving data from the computer.  
When the green LED blinks rapidly, the printer is  
printing data.  
The above example shows the black cartridges status indicated by arrows.  
Check the message to find out what the problem is and how to solve it. See  
error messages.  
On  
Blinking  
The printer is powered on and can be used.  
Red  
A minor error has occurred and the printer is  
waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the  
display message, and solve the problem referring  
The toner cartridge is low. Order a new toner  
improve print quality by redistributing the toner  
On  
A problem has occurred such as a paper jam,  
cover is open or no paper in the tray, so that the  
printer cannot continue the job. Check the  
message on the display, and see "Understanding  
problem.  
The toner cartridge is empty, or needs to be  
page 59).  
Always check the message on the display to solve the problem. The  
instruction in the Troubleshooting section will guide you to operate the  
for more information.  
14 | Introduction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
MENU OVERVIEW  
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the printer or use the printer’s functions. These menus can be accessed by pressing Menu ( ).  
Refer to the following diagram.  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your printer.  
.
Fax Feature  
Darkness  
Multi Send  
Delay Send  
Priority Send  
Forward  
Secure Receive  
Add Page  
Cancel Job  
Fax Setup  
Sending  
Redial Times  
Redial Term  
Prefix Dial  
ECM Mode  
Send Report  
Image TCR  
Dial Mode  
Fax Setup  
(Continued)  
Copy Feature  
Copy Setup  
Scan Size  
Change Default  
Copies  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Darkness  
Original Type  
Scan Feature  
Scan Feature  
(Continued)  
Stamp RCV Name Copy Collation  
USB Memory  
Scan Size  
Original Type  
Resolution  
Scan Color  
Scan Format  
E-mail  
FTP  
Scan Size  
Original Type  
Resolution  
Scan Color  
SMB  
Scan Size  
Original Type  
Resolution  
Scan Color  
RCV Start Code  
Auto Reduction  
Discard Size  
Junk Fax Setup  
DRPD Mode  
Duplex Print  
Change Default  
Resolution  
2-Up  
4-Up  
Poster Copy  
Clone Copy  
Adjust Bkgd.  
Book Copy  
Margin Shift  
Edge Erase  
Gray Enhance  
Scan Size  
Receiving  
Receive Mode  
Ring To Answer Auto Report  
Original Type  
Resolution  
Scan Color  
Darkness  
Scan Setup  
System Setup  
System Setup  
(Continued)  
Network  
System Setup  
(Continued)  
Change Default  
USB Memory  
E-mail  
FTP  
SMB  
Machine Setup  
Machine ID  
Machine Fax No  
Date & Time  
Clock Mode  
Form Menu  
Select Form  
Language  
Default Mode  
Power Save  
Scan PWR Save  
Timeout  
Job Timeout  
Altitude Adj.  
Auto Continue  
Import Setting  
Export Setting  
Paper Setup  
Paper Size  
Paper Type  
Paper Source  
Wide A4  
Report  
All Report  
TCP/IP  
Clear Setting  
All Settings  
Fax Setup  
Ethernet Speed  
Clear Setting  
Network Info  
Configuration  
Supplies Info  
Address Book  
Send Report  
Sent Report  
Fax RCV Report  
Schedule Jobs  
JunkFax Report  
Network Info.  
NetScan Report  
User Auth List  
PCL Font List  
PS3 Font List  
Stored Job  
Copy Setup  
Scan Setup  
System Setup  
Network Setup  
Address Book  
Sent Report  
Fax RCV Report  
NetScan Report  
Job Manage  
Active Job  
Store Job  
File Policy  
ImageOverwrite  
Immediate  
Send Report  
Completed Job  
Net Auth Log  
Maintenance  
Supplies Life  
Color  
On Demand  
Serial Number  
Toner Low Alert  
Sound/Volume  
Key Sound  
Alarm Sound  
Speaker  
Ringer  
Introduction | 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SUPPLIED SOFTWARE  
PRINTER DRIVER FEATURES  
You must install the printer and scanner software using the supplied Drivers  
and Utiltiies CD after you have set up your printer and connected it to your  
computer. The CD provides you with the following software.  
Your printer drivers support the following standard features:  
Paper orientation, size, source and media type selection  
Number of copies  
In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following  
table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer  
drivers:  
CD  
Printer  
CONTENTS  
Windows  
Printer driver: Use this driver to take full  
advantage of your printer’s features.  
Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file  
software CD  
Printer driver  
:
Use the PostScript driver to print documents  
with complex fonts and graphics in the PS  
language.  
Scanner driver: TWAIN and Windows  
Image Acquisition (WIA) drivers are  
available for scanning documents on your  
printer.  
FEATURE  
Color mode  
WINDOWS  
LINUX  
MACINTOSH  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
Printer quality option  
Poster printing  
X
Scan Manager: You can find out about  
Scan Manager program information and  
installed scan driver's condition.  
Multiple pages per sheet  
(N-up)  
O (2, 4)  
O
Dell Toner Management SystemTM  
:
Oa  
O
Displays the status of the printer and the  
name of the job when send a job to print.  
Fit to page printing  
Scale printing  
O
X
The Dell Toner Management SystemTM  
window also displays the level of toner  
remaining and allows you to order  
O
O
X
X
Different source for first  
page  
O
replacement toner cartridges.  
Status Monitor: This program allows you to  
monitor the printer’s status and alerts you  
when an error occurs during printing.  
Watermark  
Overlay  
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
O
SmarThru Officea: This is the  
accompanying Windows-based software for  
your multifunctional printer.  
Printer Setting Utility: This program allows  
you to set up printer’s other options from  
your computer desktop.  
Duplex  
a.This feature is not supported MAC OS X 10.3.  
Firmware Update Utility: This program  
helps you to update printer’s firmware.  
SetIP: Use this program to set your printer’s  
PostScript driver  
FEATURE  
Color mode  
WINDOWS  
LINUX  
MACINTOSH  
TCP/IP addresses.  
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
Linux  
Postscript Printer Description (PPD)  
file: Use this file to run your printer from a  
Linux computer and print documents.  
SANE: Use this driver to scan documents.  
Printer Setting Utility: This program allows  
you to set up printer’s other options from  
your computer desktop.  
Printer quality option  
Poster printing  
X
Multiple pages per sheet  
(N-up)  
O
O (2, 4)  
O
Macintosh  
Printer driver: Use this driver to take full  
advantage of your printer’s features.  
Postscript Printer Description (PPD)  
file: Use this file to run your printer from a  
Macintosh computer and print documents.  
Scanner driver: TWAIN driver is  
available for scanning documents on your  
printer.  
Oa  
O
Fit to page printing  
Scale printing  
O
X
O
X
X
X
Different source for first  
page  
O
Watermark  
Overlay  
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
O
Printer Setting Utility: This program allows  
you to set up printer’s other options from  
your computer desktop.  
Duplex  
a. Allows you to edit a scanned image in many ways using a powerful image  
editor and to send the image by email. You can also open another image  
editor program, like Adobe® Photoshop®, from SmarThru. For details, refer  
to the onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru program.  
a.This feature is not supported MAC OS X 10.3.  
16 | Introduction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
getting started  
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the printer.  
This chapter includes:  
3. Remove the tape that is holding the printer tightly.  
4. Install the toner cartridge.  
6. Ensure that all the cables are connected to the printer.  
7. Turn the printer on.  
SETTING UP THE HARDWARE  
This section shows the steps to set up the hardware which is explained in  
the Quick Install Guide. Ensure you read Quick Install Guide and complete  
following steps.  
1. Select a stable location.  
When you move the printer, do not tilt or turn it upside down.  
Otherwise, the inside of the printer may be contaminated by toner,  
which can damage the printer or result in bad print quality.  
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow  
extra space to open covers and trays.  
The area should be well-ventilated and away from direct sunlight or  
sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the printer close to the  
edge of your desk or table.  
PRINTING A DEMO PAGE  
Print a demo page to ensure that the printer is operating correctly.  
To print a demo page:  
In Ready mode, press and hold the OK button for about 2 seconds.  
SETTING UP THE NETWORK  
You need to set up the network protocols on the printer to use it as your  
network printer. You can set up the basic network settings through the  
printer's control panel.  
Supported operating environments  
The following table shows the network environments supported by the  
printer:  
ITEM  
REQUIREMENTS  
Network interface  
Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX  
Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1,000 m (3,281 ft). Refer to the  
altitude setting to optimize your printing. See "Altitude adjustment" on  
page 20 for more information.  
Network operating system  
Windows 2000/XP/2003/2008/Vista  
Various Linux OS  
Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.5  
Select a flat, stable surface that is not inclined greater than 2 mm (0.08  
inch). Otherwise, printing quality may be affected.  
Network protocols  
TCP/IP on Windows  
IPP  
SNMP  
DHCP  
BOOTP  
If you want to set up DHCP network protocol, go to http://  
system and install the program. This program will allow you to set  
network parameters automatically. Follow the instructions in the  
installation window. This program does not support Linux.  
2. Unpack the printer and check all the enclosed items.  
Getting started | 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Configuring network protocol via the printer  
You can set up TCP/IP network parameters, follow the steps listed below.  
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS  
Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following  
requirements:  
1. Ensure that your printer is connected to the network with an RJ-45  
Ethernet cable.  
2. Ensure you have turned on the printer.  
Microsoft® Windows®  
Your printer supports the following Windows operating systems.  
3. Press Menu ( ) on the control panel, until you see Network on the  
bottom line of the display.  
REQUIREMENT (RECOMMENDED)  
OPERATING  
4. Press OK to access the menu.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until TCP/IP appears.  
6. Press OK.  
FREE HDD  
SPACE  
SYSTEM  
CPU  
RAM  
7. Press the left/right arrow until Static appears.  
8. Press OK.  
9. Press the left/right arrow until IP Address appears.  
Intel® Pentinum® II  
400 MHz (Pentium III  
933 MHz)  
Windows 2000  
64 MB  
(128 MB)  
600 MB  
10. Press OK.  
Windows XP  
Intel Pentium III 933  
MHz (Pentium IV 1  
GHz)  
128 MB  
1.5 GB  
Enter a byte between 0 and 255 using the number keypad and press the  
left/right arrow to move between bytes.  
Repeat this to complete the address from the 1st byte to the 4th byte.  
(256 MB)  
Windows Server Intel Pentium III 933  
2003  
128 MB  
(512 MB)  
1.25 GB to  
2 GB  
11. When you have finished, press OK.  
MHz (Pentium IV 1  
GHz)  
Repeat steps 9 and 10 to configure the other TCP/IP parameters:  
subnet mask and gateway address.  
Windows Vista  
Intel Pentium IV 3  
GHz  
512 MB  
(1024 MB)  
15 GB  
10 GB  
Contact the network administrator if you are not sure how to configure.  
Windows Server Intel Pentium IV 1  
2008  
512 MB  
(2048 MB)  
You can also set up the network settings through the network  
administration programs.  
GHz  
(Intel Pentium IV 2  
GHz)  
Embedded Web Service: Web server embedded on your network  
print server, which allows you to:  
- Configure the network parameters necessary for the printer to  
connect to various network environments.  
Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all  
Windows operating systems.  
- Customize printer settings.  
SetIP: Utility program that allows you to select a network interface and  
manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol.  
Software installation can be only be performed by users with  
Administrator rights.  
Windows Terminal Services is compatable with this printer.  
Macintosh  
Using the SetIP program  
This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC address which is  
the hardware serial number of the network printer card or interface.  
Especially, it is for the network administrator to set several network IPs at  
the same time.  
REQUIREMENT (RECOMMENDED)  
OPERATING  
SYSTEM  
FREE HDD  
SPACE  
CPU  
RAM  
You can only use the SetIP program when your printer is  
connected to a network.  
The following procedure is based on Windows XP.  
Mac OS X  
10.3 ~ 10.4  
Intel Processor  
Power PC G4/  
G5  
128 MB for a  
Power-PC based  
Mac (512 MB).  
512 MB for an  
Intel-based Mac  
(1 GB)  
1 GB  
Setting network values  
1. Print the printer’s network configuration report to find your printer’s MAC  
Mac OS X 10.5  
Intel Processor 512 MB (1 GB)  
867 MHz or  
faster Power  
1 GB  
2. From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs  
Printers Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP Dell 2145cn Color Laser  
Set IP.  
to open the TCP/IP configuration window.  
Dell  
Dell  
MFP  
PC G4 /G5  
3. Click  
4. Enter the network card's MAC address, IP address, subnet mask,  
default gateway, and then click Apply.  
When you enter the MAC address. IP address, subnet mask,  
default gateway, and then click Apply.  
5. Click OK, then the printer prints the network information. Confirm the  
settings are correct.  
6. Click Exit.  
18 | Getting started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4. Click Next.  
Linux  
ITEM  
REQUIREMENTS  
Operating system RedHat 8.0, 9.0 (32bit)  
RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64bit)  
Fedora Core 1~7 (32/64bit)  
Mandrake 9.2 (32bit), 10.0, 10.1 (32/64bit)  
Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007 (32/64bit)  
SuSE Linux 8.2, 9.0, 9.1 (32bit)  
SuSE Linux 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2 (32/64bit)  
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/64bit)  
Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04 (32/64bit)  
Debian 3.1, 4.0 (32/64bit)  
CPU  
Pentium IV 2.4GHz (IntelCore2)  
512 MB (1024 MB)  
RAM  
If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
Free HDD space  
1 GB (2GB)  
5. Select Typical installation for a network printer, and then click Next.  
It is necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for  
working with large scanned images.  
The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at  
maximum.  
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE  
You have to install the printer software for printing. The software includes  
drivers, applications, and other user friendly programs.  
The following procedure is applicable when the printer is being  
used as a network printer. If you want to connect a printer with a  
USB cable, see the Software section.  
The following procedure is based on the Windows XP operating  
system. The procedure and popup window which appear during  
the installation may differ depending on the operating system, the  
printer feature, or the interface in use.  
6. The list of printers available on the network appears. Select the printer  
you want to install from the list and then click Next.  
1. Connect the network cable to your printer.  
2. Ensure that the network setup for your printer is completed (see "Setting  
up the network" on page 17). All applications should be closed on your  
3. Insert the Drivers and Utiltiies CD into your CD drive.  
The CD should automatically run, and an installation window appears.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start  
Run. Type  
X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your CD  
drive and click OK.  
If you use Windows Vista, click Start  
Run, and type X:\Setup.exe.  
All Programs  
Accessories  
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click Run Setup.exe  
in Install or run program field, and click Continue in the User Account  
Control window.  
If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to refresh the  
list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your printer to the network. To  
add the printer to the network, enter the port name and the IP  
address for the printer.  
To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address, print a  
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select Shared Printer  
[UNC] and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer  
Getting started | 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
by clicking the Browse button.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
If you are not sure of the IP address, contact your network  
administrator or print network information (see "Printing  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Language appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the language you want appears and press  
OK.  
7. Click Finish.  
If your printer does not work properly after the installation, try  
5. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
to reinstall the printer driver. See the Software section.  
During the printer driver installation process, the driver installer  
detects the location information for your operating system and  
sets the default paper size for your printer. If you use a  
different Windows location, you must change the paper size to  
match the paper you usually use. Go to printer properties to  
change the paper size after installation is complete.  
Setting the date and time  
The current date and time are shown on the display when your printer is on  
and ready to work.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Date & Time appears and press OK.  
4. Enter the correct time and date using the number keypad.  
Month = 01 to 12  
PRINTER'S BASIC SETTINGS  
After installation is complete, you may want to set the printer's default  
settings. Refer to the next section if you would like to set or change values.  
Day = 01 to 31  
Year = requires four digits  
Hour = 01 to 12 (12-hour mode)  
00 to 23 (24-hour mode)  
Altitude adjustment  
The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined  
by the height of the printer above sea level. The following information will  
guide you on how to set your printer to the best print quality or best quality of  
print.  
Minute = 00 to 59  
The date format may differ from country to country  
Before you set the altitude value, find the altitude where you are using the  
printer.  
You can also use the left/right arrow to move the cursor under the  
digit you want to correct and enter a new number.  
5. To select AM or PM for 12-hour format, press the *or # button or any  
number button.  
When the cursor is not under the AM or PM indicator, pressing the *or #  
button immediately moves the cursor to the indicator.  
You can change the clock mode to 24-hour format (e.g. 01:00 PM as  
13:00). For details, see the next section.  
6. Press OK to save the time and date.  
When you enter a wrong number, Out of Range appears and the printer  
does not proceed to the next step. If this happens, simply reenter the  
correct number.  
1 Normal  
2 High 1  
3 High 2  
7. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
4 High 3  
Changing the clock mode  
0
You can set your printer to display the current time using either a 12-hour or  
24-hour format.  
1. Ensure that you have installed the printer driver with the provided  
Drivers and Utiltiies CD.  
2. Click Start  
All Programs  
DELL  
DELL Printers  
Dell 2145cn  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Clock Mode appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow to select the other mode and press OK.  
Color Laser MFP  
You can also click Printer Setting Utility on the status bar in Mac OS X  
(or Notification Area in Linux).  
Printer Setting Utility.  
3. Click Setting  
Altitude Adjustment. Select the appropriate value  
from the dropdown list, and then click Apply.  
5. Press Stop/Clear  
(
) to return to Ready mode.  
If your printer is connected to a network, Embedded Web Service  
screen appears automatically. Click Machine Settings  
Setup  
Changing the default mode  
Your printer is preset to Fax mode. You can switch this default mode  
between Fax mode and Copy mode.  
(or Machine Setup) Altitude adj.. Select the appropriate  
altitude value, and then click Apply.  
Changing the display language  
To change the display language in the control panel:  
20 | Getting started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
You can enter special characters, such as space, plus sign, and etc.  
For details, see the below section.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. To enter additional letters, repeat step 1.  
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
If the next letter is printed on the same button, move the cursor by  
pressing the right left/right arrow button and then press the button  
labeled with the letter you want. The cursor will move to the right and  
the next letter will appear on the display.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Default Mode appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the default mode you want appears and  
press OK.  
5. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
You can enter a space by pressing 1 twice.  
3. When you have finished entering letters, press OK.  
Setting sounds  
You can control the following sounds:  
Keypad letters and numbers  
Key Sound: Turns the key sound on or off. With this option set to On, a  
tone sounds each time a key is pressed.  
KEY  
1
ASSIGNED NUMBERS, LETTERS, OR CHARACTERS  
Alarm Sound: Turns the alarm sound on or off. With this option set to  
On, an alarm tone sounds when an error occurs or fax communication  
ends.  
Speaker: Turns on or off the sounds from the telephone line through  
the speaker, such as a dial tone or a fax tone. With this option set to  
Comm. which means “Common,” the speaker is on until the remote  
printer answers.  
1
Space  
2
A
D
G
J
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
-
C
F
I
a
d
g
j
b
e
h
c
f
2
3
3
4
i
4
You can adjust the volume level using On Hook Dial ( ).  
5
L
k
l
5
Ringer: Adjusts the ringer volume. For the ringer volume, you can  
select Off, Low, Mid, and High.  
6
M
P
T
O
m
n
o
6
r
7
R
V
Y
,
S
p
q
s
7
Speaker, ringer, key sound, and alarm sound  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Sound/Volume appears and press  
OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the sound option you want appears  
and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the desired status or volume for the  
sound you have selected appears and press OK.  
5. If necessary, repeat steps 3 through 5 to set other sounds.  
8
t
u
v
/
8
9
W
Z
w
x
y
z
9
0
+
.
*
#
&
@
0
Correcting numbers or names  
If you make a mistake while entering a number or name, press the left  
left/right arrow button to delete the last digit or character. Then enter the  
correct number or character.  
6. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Inserting a pause  
Speaker volume  
1. Press On Hook Dial ( ). A dial tone sounds from the speaker.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until you hear the volume you want.  
With some telephone systems, you must dial an access code (9, for  
example) and listen for a second dial tone. In such cases, you must  
insert a pause in the telephone number. You can insert a pause while  
you are setting up speed buttons or speed dial numbers.  
To insert a pause, press Redial/Pause at the appropriate place while  
entering the telephone number. A - appears on the display at the  
corresponding location.  
3. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to save the change and return to Ready  
mode.  
You can adjust the speaker volume only when the telephone line is  
connected.  
Using the save modes  
Power Save mode  
Entering characters using the number keypad  
Power Save mode allows your printer to reduce power consumption  
when it is not in actual use. You can turn this mode on and select a  
length of time for which the printer waits after a job is printed before it  
switches to a reduced power state.  
As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and numbers.  
For example, when you set up your printer, you enter your name or your  
company’s name, and the fax number. When you store fax numbers or  
email addresses in memory, you may also enter the corresponding names.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Power Save appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the time setting you want appears and  
press OK.  
Entering alphanumeric characters  
1. When you are prompted to enter a letter, locate the button labeled  
with the character you want. Press the button until the correct letter  
appears on the display.  
For example, to enter the letter O, press 6, labeled with MNO.  
Each time you press 6, the display shows a different letter, M, N, O,  
m, n, o and finally 6.  
5. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Getting started | 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
You can also click Printer Setting Utility on the status bar in Mac OS X  
(or Notification Area in Linux).  
3. Click Printer Setting Utility.  
4. Click Emulation.  
5. Confirm if PCL is selected in Emulation Setting.  
6. Click Setting.  
Scan power save mode  
Scan Power Save mode allows you to save power by turning off the  
scan lamp. The scan lamp under the scanner glass automatically turns  
off when it is not in actual use to reduce power consumption and  
extends the life of the lamp. The lamp automatically wakes up after  
some warm-up time when you start scanning.  
You can set the length of time for which the scan lamp waits after a scan  
job is completed before it switches to the power save mode.  
7. Select your preferred font in the Symbol set list.  
8. Click Apply.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
Following information shows the proper font list for corresponding  
languages.  
Russian: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic  
Hebrew: Hebrew 15Q, Hebrew-8, Hebrew-7 (Israel only)  
Greek: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek  
Arabic & Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864,  
Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Scan PWR Save appears and press  
OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the time setting you want appears and  
press OK.  
5. Press Stop/Clear  
(
) to return to Ready mode.  
OCR : OCR-A, OCR-B  
Setting print job timeout  
You can set the amount of time a single print job is active before it must  
print.The printer handles incoming data as a single job if it comes in within  
the specified time. When an error occurs while processing data from the  
computer and the data flow stops, the printer waits the specified time and  
then cancels printing if data flow does not resume.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Job Timeout appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the time setting you want appears and  
press OK.  
5. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Auto continue  
This is the option to set the printer to continue printing or not, in case the  
paper size you have set and the paper within the tray mismatches.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Auto Continue appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you want appears.  
On: Automatically prints after set time passes, when the paper size  
mismatches the tray paper size.  
Off: Waits until you press Black Start ( ) or Color Start ( ) on  
the control panel, when the paper size mismatches the tray paper  
size.  
5. Press OK to save your selection.  
6. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Changing the font setting  
Your printer has preset the font for your region or country.  
If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition such as  
the DOS environment, you can change the font setting as follows:  
1. Ensure that you have installed the printer driver from the provided  
Drivers and Utiltiies CD.  
2. Click Start  
All Programs  
DELL  
DELL Printers  
Dell 2145cn  
Color Laser MFP  
Printer Setting Utility.  
22 | Getting started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
loading originals and print media  
This chapter introduces you how to load originals and print media into your printer.  
This chapter includes:  
2. Place the original face down on the scanner glass and align it with the  
LOADING ORIGINALS  
registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.  
You can use the scanner glass or DADF to load an original for copying,  
scanning, and sending a fax.  
Dell 2145cn has the DADF function which can let you scan on both  
sides of the original media at once. See "Scan on both sides of  
On the scanner glass  
Ensure that no originals are in the DADF. If an original is detected in the  
DADF, the printer gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass. To  
get the best scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled images, use  
the scanner glass.  
1. Lift and open the scanner lid.  
3. Close the scanner lid.  
Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality  
and toner consumption.  
Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout.  
Always keep it clean.  
If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the scanner  
lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid.  
If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with  
the lid open.  
In the DADF  
Using the DADF, you can load up to 50 sheets of paper (75 g/m2, 20 lb  
bond) for one job.  
When you use the DADF:  
Do not load paper smaller than 148 x 148 mm (5.8 x 5.8 inches) or  
larger than 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).  
Do not attempt to load the following types of paper:  
- carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper  
- coated paper  
- onion skin or thin paper  
- wrinkled or creased paper  
- curled or rolled paper  
- torn paper  
Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.  
Ensure that any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely  
dry before loading.  
Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.  
Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents having  
other unusual characteristics.  
Loading originals and print media | 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
1. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before  
SELECTING PRINT MEDIA  
loading originals.  
You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes,  
labels, and transparencies. Always use print media that meet the guidelines  
for use with your printer. Print media that does not meet the guidelines  
outlined in this user’s guide may cause the following problems:  
Poor print quality  
Increased paper jams  
Premature wear on the printer.  
Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are  
important factors that affect the printer’s performance and the output quality.  
When you choose print materials, consider the following:  
2. Load the original face up into the DADF. Ensure that the bottom of the  
original stack matches the paper size marked on the document input  
tray.  
The type, size and weight of the print media for your printer are  
described later in this section.  
Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for  
your project.  
Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce  
sharper, more vibrant images.  
Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how  
crisp the printing looks on the paper.  
Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and  
still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result of  
improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels,  
or other variables over which Dell has no control.  
Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it  
meets the requirements specified in this user’s guide.  
Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause  
problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Dell’s  
warranty or service agreements.  
3. Adjust the document width guides to the paper size.  
Dust on the DADF glass may cause black lines on the printout. Always  
keep it clean.  
24 | Loading originals and print media  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Specifications on print media  
WEIGHTA  
CAPACITYB  
TYPE  
Plain paper  
SIZE  
DIMENSIONS  
Letter  
Legal  
US Folio  
A4  
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)  
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)  
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)  
210 x 297 mm (8.26 x 11.69 inches)  
216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)  
182 x 257 mm (7.16 x 10.11 inches)  
176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)  
184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)  
148 x 210 mm (5.82 x 8.26 inches)  
140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches)  
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.82 inches)  
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb  
bond) for the tray  
250 sheets of 75 g/m2  
(20 lb bond) paper for the  
tray  
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb  
bond) for the multi-purpose  
tray  
100 sheets of 75 g/m2  
(20 lb bond) in the multi-  
purpose tray  
500 sheets of 75 g/m2  
(20 lb bond) paper for  
optional tray  
Oficio  
JIS B5  
ISO B5  
Executive  
A5  
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb  
bond) for the tray  
150 sheets of 75 g/m2  
(20 lb bond) paper for the  
tray  
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb  
bond) for the multi-purpose  
tray  
Statement  
A6  
100 sheets of 75 g/m2  
(20 lb bond) in the multi-  
purpose tray  
75 to 105 g/m2 (20 to 28 lb  
bond)  
10 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb  
bond) in the multi-purpose  
tray  
Envelope  
Envelope Monarch  
Envelope 6 3/4  
Envelope No. 10  
Envelope No. 9  
Envelope DL  
98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches)  
92 x 165 mm (3.62 x 6.5 inches)  
105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)  
98 x 225 mm (3.87 x 8.87 inches)  
110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)  
162 x 229 mm (6.37 x 9.01 inches)  
114 x 162 mm (4.48 x 6.38 inches)  
Refer to the Plain paper section  
Envelope C5  
Envelope C6  
120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb  
bond)  
10 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb  
bond) paper for the multi-  
purpose tray  
Labels  
Letter, Legal, US  
Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO  
B5, Executive, A5,  
Statement  
90 to 163 g/m2 (24 to 43 lb  
bond)  
10 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb  
bond) paper for the multi-  
purpose tray  
Card stock  
Letter, Legal, US  
Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO  
B5, Executive, A5,  
Statement  
Refer to the Plain paper section  
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to43 lb bond)  
Minimum size (custom)  
Maximum size (custom)  
76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches)  
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)  
a.If media weight is over 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond), use the multi-purpose tray.  
b.Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.  
Loading originals and print media | 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Media sizes supported in each mode  
MEDIA TYPE  
GUIDELINES  
MODE  
Copy mode  
SIZE  
SOURCE  
tray 1  
optional tray 2  
multi-purpose tray  
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with  
more than one flap that folds over to seal must use  
adhesives compatible with the printer’s fusing  
temperature for 0.1 second. Check your printer’s  
specification to view the fusing temperature. See  
and may even damage the fuser.  
For the best print quality, position margins no closer  
than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope.  
Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s  
seams meet.  
Letter, A4, Legal,  
Oficio, US Folio,  
Executive, JIS B5, A5,  
A6  
Print mode  
All sizes supported by  
the printer  
tray 1  
optional tray 2  
multi-purpose tray  
Fax mode  
Letter, A4, Legal  
tray 1  
optional tray 2  
Labels  
To avoid damaging the printer, use only labels  
designed for use in laser printers.  
- When selecting labels, consider the following  
factors:  
Duplex printinga  
Letter, A4, Legal, US  
Folio, Oficio  
tray 1  
optional tray 2  
multi-purpose tray  
a.75 to 105 g/m2 (20~28 lb bond) only  
- Adhesives: The adhesive material should be  
stable at your printer’s fusing temperature. Check  
your printer’s specification to view the fusing  
Guidelines for special print media  
- Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed  
backing between them. Labels can peel off sheets  
that have spaces between the labels, causing  
serious jams.  
- Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no  
more than 13 mm of curl in any direction.  
- Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles,  
bubbles, or other indications of separation.  
Ensure that there is no exposed adhesive material  
between labels. Exposed areas can cause labels to  
peel off during printing, which can cause paper  
jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to  
printer components.  
Do not run a sheet of labels through the printer more  
than once. The adhesive backing is designed for  
only a single pass through the printer.  
Do not use labels that are separating from the  
backing sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise  
damaged.  
MEDIA TYPE  
Envelopes  
GUIDELINES  
Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the  
quality of the envelopes. When selecting envelopes,  
consider the following factors:  
- Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should  
not exceed 90 g/m2 or jamming may occur.  
- Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should  
lie flat with less than 6 mm curl, and should not  
contain air.  
- Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled,  
nicked, or otherwise damaged.  
- Temperature: You should use envelopes that are  
compatible with the heat and pressure of the  
printer during operation.  
Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp and  
well creased folds.  
Do not use stamped envelopes.  
Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows,  
coated lining, self-adhesive seals, or other synthetic  
materials.  
Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.  
Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope  
extends all the way to the corner of the envelope.  
Card stock or  
custom-sized  
materials  
Do not print on media smaller than 76 mm wide or  
356 mm long.  
In the software application, set margins at least  
6.4 mm away from the edges of the material.  
1 Acceptable  
2 Unacceptable  
26 | Loading originals and print media  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
side of the stack. Do not press the guide too tightly to the edge of the  
paper; the guide may bend the paper.  
MEDIA TYPE  
GUIDELINES  
Preprinted  
paper  
Letterhead must be printed with heat-resistant ink  
that will not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous  
emissions when subjected to the printer’s fusing  
temperature for 0.1 second. Check your printer’s  
specification to view the fusing temperature, see  
not adversely affect printer rollers.  
Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a  
moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes during  
storage.  
When you use legal-sized paper, you need to extend the length of the  
tray.  
3. Press and hold the green lever on the back of the tray, when you are  
Before you load preprinted paper, such as forms  
and letterhead, verify that the ink on the paper is  
dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off  
preprinted paper, reducing print quality.  
holding the lever, extend the tray to the corresponding position.  
CHANGING THE SIZE OF THE PAPER IN THE  
PAPER TRAY  
To load longer sizes of paper, such as Legal-sized paper, you need to  
adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray.  
1 Tray extend lever  
2 Paper length guide  
3 Paper width guide  
4. Load the paper into the tray.  
5. Place the tray into the printer.  
6. Set the paper size from your computer.  
1. Adjust the paper length guide to the desired paper length. It is preset to  
Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the  
materials to warp.  
If you do not adjust the paper width guides, it may cause paper  
jams.  
Letter or A4 size depending on the country.  
LOADING PAPER  
2. After inserting paper into the tray, while pinching the paper width guide  
as shown, move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly touches the  
Loading paper in the tray 1 or optional tray  
Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs in the tray 1.  
The tray 1 can hold a maximum of 250 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) plain  
paper.  
You can purchase an optional tray and attach it below the standard tray to  
load an additional 500 sheets of paper (see "Accessories" on page 83).  
Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems,  
requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Dell’s warranty or  
service agreements.  
Loading originals and print media | 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
1. Pull out the tray and adjust the tray size to the media size you are  
Loading paper in the multi-purpose tray  
The multi-purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material,  
such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes. It is useful for single page  
printing on letterhead or colored paper.  
loading.  
2. Place paper with the side you want to print facing up.  
Tips on using the multi-purpose tray  
Load only one size of print media at a time in the multi-purpose tray.  
To prevent paper jams, do not add paper when there is still paper in  
the multi-purpose tray. This also applies to other types of print  
media.  
Print media should be loaded face down with the top edge going into  
the multi-purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray.  
Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and  
them into the multi-purpose tray.  
1. Hold the handle of multi-purpose tray and pull it down to open.  
1 Full  
2 Empty  
3. When you print a document, set the paper source and type in the  
software application. See Software section for printing from your  
computer.  
If you experience problems with paper feed, place one sheet at a  
time in the multi-purpose tray.  
You can load previously printed paper. The printed side should be  
facing down with an uncurled edge at the front. If you experience  
problems with paper feed, turn the paper around. Note that print  
quality is not guaranteed.  
2. Load the paper.  
If you want to load the used paper, place the paper with the  
printed side facing down.  
If you are using paper, flex or fan the edge of the paper stack  
to separate the pages before loading.  
28 | Loading originals and print media  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3. Squeeze the multi-purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them to  
the width of the paper. Do not force too much, or the paper will be bent,  
which will result in a paper jam or skew.  
ADJUSTING THE OUTPUT SUPPORT  
The printed pages stack on the output tray, and the output support will help  
the printed pages to align. For the output support to correctly align the  
pages, you need to pull it out appropriately depending on the paper size.  
1 Output support  
2 Extension  
Depending on the media type you are using, keep the following  
loading guidelines:  
If the output support is incorrectly adjusted, printed pages may be  
mis-aligned or fall.  
If you continuously print many pages, the surface of the output tray  
may become hot. Be careful not to touch the surface, and  
especially keep out of children’s reach.  
Envelopes: Flap side down and with the stamp area on the  
top left side.  
Labels: Print side up and top short edge entering the printer  
first.  
Preprinted paper: Design side up with the top edge toward the  
printer.  
Card stock: Print side up and the short edge entering the  
printer first.  
Previously printed paper: Previously printed side down with  
an uncurled edge toward the printer.  
For Letter-sized paper  
Pull out the output support to the location indicated LTR as shown, and  
unfold the extension.  
4. When you print a document, set the paper source and type in the  
software application. See Software section for printing from your  
computer.  
The settings made from the printer driver override the settings on  
the control panel.  
5. After printing, close the multi-purpose tray.  
For A4- or Legal-sized paper  
Pull out the output support to the location indicated A4, LGL as shown, and  
unfold the extension.  
Loading originals and print media | 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SETTING THE PAPER SIZE AND TYPE  
After loading paper in the paper tray, you need to set the paper size and  
type using the control panel buttons. These settings will apply to Copy and  
Fax modes. For printing from your computer, you need to select the paper  
size and type in the application program you use on your PC.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Paper Setup appears and press OK.  
3. Press OK when Paper Size appears.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the paper tray you want appears and  
press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the paper size you are using appears and  
press OK.  
6. Press Back ( ) to return to the upper level.  
7. Press the left/right arrow until Paper Type appears and press OK.  
8. Press the left/right arrow until the paper type you are using appears and  
press OK.  
9. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
If you want to use special sized paper such as a billing paper, select  
Custom in the Paper tab in the printer propeties. See Software  
section.  
30 | Loading originals and print media  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
copying  
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for copying documents.  
This chapter includes:  
Darkness  
SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY  
If you have an original containing faint markings and dark images, you can  
adjust the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read.  
After loading the print media for copy output, you must select the paper tray  
you will use for copy jobs.  
To adjust the darkness of copies, press Darkness ( ). Each time you  
press the button, the following modes are available:  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Paper Setup appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Paper Source appears and press OK.  
4. Press OK when Copy Tray appears.  
Lightest: Works well with darker print.  
Light: Works well with dark print.  
Normal: Works well with standard typed or printed originals.  
Dark: Works well with light print.  
Darkest: Works well with lighter print or faint pencil markings.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the paper tray you want appears and  
press OK.  
6. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Original type  
The original type setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the  
document type for the current copy job.  
COPYING  
h
To select the document type, press Original Type ( ). Each time you  
press the button, the following modes are available:  
1. Press Copy.  
Ready to Copy appears on the top line of the display.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF, or place a single original face  
down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see "Loading originals" on  
3. Enter the number of copies using the number keypad, if necessary.  
Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.  
Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.  
Photo: Use when the originals are photographs.  
Magazine: Use when the originals are magazines.  
4. If you want to customize the copy settings including copy size, darkness,  
and original type, by using the control panel buttons. See the next  
section.  
Reduced or enlarged copy  
By using the Reduce/Enlarge ( ) button, you can reduce or enlarge the  
size of a copied image from 25% to 400% when you copy original  
documents from the scanner glass, or from 25% to 100% from the DADF.  
If necessary, you can use special copy features, such as poster copying,  
2- or 4-up copying. See "ID card copying" on page 32.  
To select from the predefined copy sizes:  
5. Press Color Start ( ) to begin color copying.  
1. Press Reduce/Enlarge ( ).  
Or, press Black Start ( ) to begin black and white copying.  
You can cancel the copy job during an operation. Press Stop/Clear  
2. Press Reduce/Enlarge ( ) or the left/right arrow until the size  
setting you want appears and press OK.  
(
), and the copying will stop.  
To scale the copy by directly entering the scale rate:  
1. Press Reduce/Enlarge ( ).  
CHANGING THE SETTINGS FOR EACH COPY  
Your printer provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly  
and easily make a copy. However, if you want to change the options for  
each copy, use the copy function buttons on the control panel.  
2. Press Reduce/Enlarge ( ) or the left/right arrow until Custom  
appears and press OK.  
3. Enter the scale rate and press OK to save the selection.  
When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the  
bottom of your copy.  
If you press Stop/Clear ( ) while setting the copy options, all of the  
options you have set for the current copy job will be canceled and  
returned to their default status. Or, they will automatically return to  
their default status after the printer completes the copy in progress.  
Copying | 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
5. Open the scanner lid and turn the original over.  
CHANGING THE SCAN SIZE SETTINGS  
If you press Stop/Clear ( ) or if no buttons are pressed for  
approximately 30 seconds, the printer cancels the copy job and  
returns to Ready mode.  
You can adjust the scan size for the original paper. For example, if you scan  
a A4-sized original and set the scan size to A5, the printer scans only the  
area of A5 (148 x 210 mm). We recommend you to change the right scan  
size for the original paper. After loading the print media for copy output, you  
need to set the scan size using the control panel buttons.  
6. Press Color Start ( ) to begin color copying.  
Or, press Black Start ( ) to begin black and white copying  
1. Press Copy.  
If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may not  
be printed.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
If you press Stop/Clear ( ) or if no buttons are pressed for  
approximately 30 seconds, the printer cancels the copy job and  
returns to Ready mode.  
3. Press OK when Scan Size appears.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the setting you want appears and press  
OK.  
5. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
USING SPECIAL COPY FEATURES  
You can use the following copy features:  
Collation  
After using this option, the printer automatically resumes to the default  
setting.  
CHANGING THE DEFAULT COPY SETTINGS  
You can set the printer to sort the copy job. For example, if you make 2  
copies of a 3 page original, one complete 3 page document will print  
followed by a second complete document.  
The copy options, including darkness, original type, copy size, and number  
of copies, can be set to those most frequently used. When you copy a  
document, the default settings are used unless they have been changed by  
using the corresponding buttons on the control panel.  
1. Press Copy.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF, or place a single  
original face down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see "Loading  
1. Press Copy.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
3. Press OK when Change Default appears.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the setup option you want appears and  
press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the setting you want appears and press  
OK.  
3. Enter the number of copies using the number keypad.  
4. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the  
bottom line of the display and press OK.  
5. Press OK when Copy Collation appears.  
6. Press the left/right arrow to select the color mode you  
want.  
6. Repeat steps 4 through 5, as needed.  
There are two types of mode as following:  
7. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Yes-Color: Color copy  
Yes-Mono: Black and White copy  
While you are setting copy options, pressing Stop/Clear ( ) cancels  
the changed settings and restores the defaults.  
7. Press OK to begin copying.  
One complete document will print followed by the second complete  
document.  
ID CARD COPYING  
Your printer can print 2-sided originals on one sheet of A4-, Letter-, Legal-,  
Folio-, Oficio-, Executive-, B5-, A5-, or A6-sized paper.  
2-up or 4-up copying  
Your printer can print 2 or 4 original images reduced to fit onto one sheet of  
paper.  
When you copy using this feature, the printer prints one side of the original  
on the upper half of the paper and the other side on the lower half without  
reducing the size of the original. This feature is helpful for copying a small-  
sized item, such as a name card.  
1. Press Copy.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF, or place a single  
original face down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see "Loading  
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner  
glass.  
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the  
bottom line of the display and press OK.  
1. Press ID Copy (  
).  
1
3
2
4
2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see "Loading  
4. Press the left/right arrow until 2-Up or 4-Up appears  
and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow to select the color mode you  
want.  
3. Place Front Side and Press[Start] appears on the  
display.  
There are two types of mode as following:  
Yes-Color: Color copy  
Yes-Mono: Black and White copy  
4. Press Color Start ( ) or Black Start  
(
) .  
Your printer begins scanning the front side and shows  
6. Press OK to begin copying.  
Place Back Side and Press[Start]  
You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/Enlarge (  
)
button for making a 2- or 4-up copy.  
32 | Copying  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Poster copying  
Your printer can print an image onto 9 sheets of paper (3x3). You can paste  
the printed pages together to make one poster-sized document.  
Adjusting background images  
You can set the printer to print an image without its background. This copy  
feature removes the background color and can be helpful when copying an  
original containing color in the background, such as a newspaper or a  
catalog.  
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner  
glass.  
1. Press Copy.  
1. Press Copy.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF, or place a single original face  
down on the scanner glass.  
2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see "Loading  
For details about loading an original, see "Loading originals" on  
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the  
bottom line of the display and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until Poster Copy appears  
and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow to select the color mode you  
want.  
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until Adjust Bkgd. appears and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you want appears.  
Off: Does not use this feature.  
Auto: Optimizes the background.  
Enhance Lev. 1~2: The higher the number is, the more vivid the  
background is.  
There are two types of mode as following:  
Yes-Color: Color copy  
Yes-Mono: Black and White copy  
Erase Lev. 1~4: The higher the number is, the lighter the  
background is.  
6. Press OK to begin copying.  
Your original is divided into 9 portions. Each portion is  
scanned and printed one by one in the following order:  
6. Press OK to begin copying.  
7. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Book copying  
The Book Copy feature allows you to copy an entire book. If the book is too  
thick, lift the cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close  
the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with  
the cover open.  
Clone copying  
Your printer can print multiple image copies from the original document on a  
single page. The number of images is automatically determined by the  
original image and paper size.  
1. Press Copy.  
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner  
glass.  
2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see "Loading  
1. Press Copy.  
2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see "Loading  
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the  
bottom line of the display and press OK.  
4. Press OK when Book Copy appears.  
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the  
bottom line of the display and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until Clone Copy appears  
and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you  
want appears.  
Off: Does not use this feature.  
Left Page: Use this option to print left page of the book.  
Right Page: Use this option to print right page of the book.  
Both Page: Use this option to print both pages of the book.  
5. Press the left/right arrow to select the color mode you want.  
There are two types of mode as following:  
Yes-Color: Color copy  
Yes-Mono: Black and White copy  
6. Press the left/right arrow to select the color mode you want.  
There are two types of mode as following:  
6. Press OK to begin copying.  
Yes-Color: Color copy  
Yes-Mono: Black and White copy  
You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/Enlarge (  
button while making a clone copy.  
)
7. Press OK to begin copying.  
Copying | 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Margin shift  
Gray enhance copying  
When you copy the original in gray scale, use this feature for the better  
quality of copy-output. This feature is only for the copy in gray scale.  
The Margin Shift feature allows you to create a binding edge for the  
document. The image can be adjusted up or down on the page and/or  
shifted to the right or left.  
1. Press Copy.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF, or place a single original face  
down on the scanner glass.  
The Margin Shift feature can either be used for Scan glass or DADF  
depending on the set up.  
-Auto Center: Scanner glass  
For details about loading an original, see "Loading originals" on  
-Custom Margin: Scanner glass, DADF  
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
4. Press OK when Gray Enhance appears.  
5. Press the left/right arrow to select On.  
6. Press OK to begin copying.  
1. Press Copy.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF, or place a single  
original face down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see "Loading  
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the  
bottom line of the display and press OK.  
7. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
4. Press OK when Margin Shift appears.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you want appears.  
PRINTING ON BOTH SIDES OF PAPER  
By using the Duplex ( ) button on your printerprinter, you can set the  
Y
X
Off: This feature is disabled.  
Auto Center: Automatically copy in the center of the paper.  
Custom Margin: Enter the left, right, top, bottom margin using  
printer to print documents on both sides of paper.  
1. Press Copy.  
Number keypad.  
6. Press the left/right arrow to select Yes.  
7. Press OK to begin copying.  
2. Press Duplex ( ).  
Y
X
3. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you want appears.  
Off: Copys in Normal mode.  
1->2Side Short: Copys pages to be read by flipping like a note pad.  
8. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Edge erase  
Edge erase allows you to erase sports, drill holes, fold creases and staple  
marks along any of the four edges of a document.  
The Edge Erase feature can either be used for scan glass or DADF  
1->2Side Long: Copys pages to be read like a book.  
depending on the set up.  
-
-
-
-
Small Original: Scanner glass  
Hole Punch: Scanner glass, DADF  
Book Center: Scanner glass  
Border Erase: Scanner glass, DADF  
1. Press Copy.  
2 ->1Side: Copys both sides of the originals and prints each of one on  
a separate sheet.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF, or place a single  
original face down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see "Loading  
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the  
bottom line of the display and press OK.  
4. Press OK when Edge Erase appears.  
2 ->2Side: Copys both sides of the original and prints on both sides  
of the paper. This function produces exactly the same print out from  
the originals.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you want appears.  
Off: Does not set the binding option.  
Small Original: Erases the edge of the original if it is small.  
Hole Punch: Erases the marks of bookbinding holes.  
Book Center: Erases the middle part of the paper which is black  
and horizontal, when you copy a book.  
2 ->1Side ROT2: Copys both sides of the original and prints each one  
on a separate sheet, but the information on the back side of the printout  
is rotated 180°.  
Border Erase: Erases the certain amount of the edge of the  
printout.  
6. Press OK to begin copying.  
7. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
4. Press OK to save your selection.  
If the mode is enabled, the Duplex ( ) button is backlit.  
Y
X
34 | Copying  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
SETTING COPY TIMEOUT  
You can set the time the printer waits before it restores the default copy settings,  
if you do not start copying after changing them on the control panel.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Timeout appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the time setting you want appears.  
Selecting Off means that the printer does not restore the default settings  
until you press Black Start ( ) or Color Start ( ) to begin copying,  
or Stop/Clear ( ) to cancel.  
5. Press OK to save your selection.  
6. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Copying | 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
scanning  
Scanning with your printer lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer.  
This chapter includes:  
SCANNING FROM THE CONTROL PANEL  
The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various  
factors, including computer speed, available disk space, memory, the  
size of the image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus,  
depending on your system and what you are scanning, you may not  
be able to scan at certain resolutions, especially using enhanced  
resolution.  
Your printer offers you to scan from the control panel and easily send the  
scanned document to connected computer's My Documents folder. In  
order to use this function, your printer and computer must be connect by  
USB cable or by network.  
Also, with the offered Dell Scan Manager program, scanned documents  
can be opened with the program you have setup previously. Such as  
Microsoft Paint, Email, SmarThru Office, OCR can be added to application  
SCANNING BASICS  
You can scan the originals with your printer via an USB cable or the  
network.  
Scanned images can be saved as BMP, JEPG, TIFF, PDF files.  
Dell Scan Manager: You just walk to the printer with the originals and  
scan them from the control panel then, the scanned data will be stored in  
the connected computers My Documents folder. When the setup  
installation is completed, then you have installed the Dell Scan  
Manager on your computer already. This feature can be used via the  
local connection or the network connection. See next section.  
Setting scan information in Dell Scan Manager.  
You can find out about Dell Scan Manager program information and  
installed scan driver's condition. Also, you can change scan settings and  
add or delete the folders where scanned documents to computer are save in  
Dell Scan Manager program.  
TWAIN: TWAIN is the one of preset imaging applications. Scanning an  
image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the  
scanning process. This feature can be used via the local connection or  
the network connection. See Software section.  
Dell SmarThru Office : This feature is the accompanying software for  
your printer. You can use this program to scan images or documents,  
and this feature can be used via the local connection or the network  
connection. See Software section.  
Dell Scan Manager program can only be used in the Windows.  
1. Press Start  
Control Panel  
Dell Scan Manager.  
Dell Scan Manager Administration appears.  
2. Select the appropriate printer from the Dell Scan Manager.  
3. Press Scan Property.  
4. Set Scan Button allows you to change the saving destination and scan  
settings, add or delete application program and format files.  
You can change the scanning printer by using Change Port. (Local or  
Network)  
WIA: WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition. To use this feature  
your computer must be connected directly with the printer via an USB  
cable. See Software section.  
5. Press OK after setting is done.  
Email: You can send the scanned image as an attachment to an email.  
FTP: You can scan an image and upload it to an FTP server. See  
Scanning to application programs  
1. Ensure that your printer and computer are turned on and properly  
SMB: You can scan an image and send it to a shared folder on an SMB  
connected to each other.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF, or place a single original face  
down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see "Loading originals" on  
3. Press Scan/Email.  
Ready to Scan appears on the top line of the display.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until Scan to PC appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the option you want appears and press  
OK.  
6. Depending on the port connection, different massages appear. Check  
the following messages and move on to the next step.  
Scan Destination: Connected by USB. Move to step 7.  
ID: Connected by Network and user is registered. Move to step 8.  
36 | Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
WLocal PC X: Choosing USB or Network to scan. If connected by  
USB, move to step 7. If connected by Network, move to step 8.  
Not Available: Neither connected by USB nor Network. Check the  
port connection.  
5. Select an index number corresponding to the location for storing the  
entry, from 1 to 50.  
6. Enter your name, auth ID, password, e-mail address and phone  
number.  
You need to enter the registered user ID and password in the printer  
when you start scanning to email from the control panel.  
7. Click Apply.  
7. Press the left/right arrow until the port you want appears on the display.  
8. Enter the registered user ID and PIN and click OK.  
ID is the same ID as the registered ID for Dell Scan Manager.  
PIN is the 4 digit number registered for Dell Scan Manager.  
Register authorized network users  
1. Enter your printer’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go  
to access the web site of your printer.  
2. Click Machine Settings.  
3. Select Network Authentication on the General Setup of User  
Authentication web page.  
4. Click Apply and OK.  
9. From Scan Destination, press the left/right arrow until the application  
program you want appears, then press OK.  
Default setting is My Documents.  
To add or delete the folder where the scanned file is saved, add or  
delete the application program in Dell Scan Manager  
Button.  
Set Scan  
5. Select the Authentication Type that you prefer.  
6. Configure the values for each feature, as follows.  
7. Click Apply.  
10. To scan from the default setting, press Color Start ( ) or Black Start  
) . Press the left/right button until the setting you want appears then  
(
press OK.  
11. Scanning begins.  
Network user authenticated by Kerberos  
1. Enter the realm used for Kerberos login.  
2. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
3. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
4. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 88.  
Scanned image is saved in computer's My Documents  
Pictures Dell folder.  
You can use Tawin driver to scan quickly in Dell Scan  
Manager program.  
You can also scan by pressing Window's Start  
Panel Dell Scan Manager Quick Scan.  
My  
Control  
5. You can add a backup domain as a previous step.  
6. Click Apply.  
Network user authorized by SMB  
1. Enter the domain that is used for SMB login.  
2. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
3. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
4. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 139.  
5. You can add a backup domain as a previous step.  
6. Click Apply.  
SCANNING BY A NETWORK CONNECTION  
If you have connected your printer to a network and set up the network  
parameters correctly, you can scan and send images over the network.  
Preparing for network scanning  
Before using your printer’s network scanning features, you need to  
configure the following settings, depending on your scan destination:  
Register as an authorized user for scanning to email, FTP, or SMB  
Set up the SMTP server for scanning to email  
Set up the FTP servers for scanning to FTP  
User can add up to 6 alternate domains.  
Set up the SMB servers for scanning to SMB  
Network authorized user by LDAP  
User authentication for network scanning  
To send an email, FTP, SMB or Network, you must register authorized  
local or network users using Embedded Web Service.  
1. Enter your printer’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go  
to access the web site of your printer.  
2. Click Machine Settings and LDAP Server Setup.  
3. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
4. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
5. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 389.  
If user authentication has been activated, only authorized local users  
or on the DB server (SMB, LDAP, Kerberos) can send scanned data  
to the network (email, FTP, SMB, Network).  
For network scanning using the authentication feature, you must  
register the network or local authentication configuration using the  
Embedded Web Service.  
6. Enter Search Root Directory, the top search level of the LDAP  
directory tree.  
User authentication has 3 options: none (Default), network  
authentication, and local authentication.  
7. Select Authentication method. Two options for LDAP server login.  
Anonymous:This is used to bind with null password and login ID  
(Password and login ID are grayed out in Embedded Web Service).  
Simple: This is used to bind with the login ID and password in  
Embedded Web Service.  
8. Check the box next to Append Root to Base DN.  
9. Select Match User’s Login ID to the following LDAP attribute  
Registering local authorized users  
1. Enter your printer’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go  
to access the web site of your printer.  
2. Click Machine Settings.  
3. Select Local Authentication on the General Setup of the User  
Authentication web page.  
4. Click Add.  
(options are CN, UID, or UserPrincipalName).  
Scanning | 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10. Enter your login name, password, maximum number of search  
Setting up an SMB server  
To use an SMB server, you need to set up parameters for access to  
SMB servers using Embedded Web Service.  
1. Enter your printer’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go  
to access the web site of your printer.  
results and search timeout.  
LDAP Referral: LDAP client will search referral server if the  
LDAP server has no data to reply to query and if the LDAP server  
has a referral server.  
2. Click Machine Settings and SMB Setup.  
3. Click Server List.  
4. Click Add.  
11. Select Serach Name Order that you desire.  
12. Check the box next to "From:" Field Security Options.  
This option is only provided if you have selected the Network  
authentication option in the user authentication setting. You may  
check this option if you want to search for information in a default  
email address group.  
5. Select the index number, from 1 to 20.  
6. Enter a name in Alias for the Setup for the corresponding Server  
List entry. This name will be displayed on your printer.  
7. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
8. Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.  
9. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 139.  
10. Enter the Share name of the server.  
11. Check the box next to Anonymous if you want to permit  
unauthorized persons to access the SMB server. This box is  
unchecked by default.  
13. Click Apply.  
Setting up an e-mail account  
To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up  
network parameters using Embedded Web Service.  
1. Enter your printer’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go  
to access the web site of your printer.  
2. Click Machine Settings and E-mail Setup.  
3. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
4. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
5. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 25.  
12. Enter the login name and password.  
13. Enter the domain name of the SMB server.  
14. Enter the Scan File Folder under shared folder for storing the  
scanned image.  
15. Click Apply.  
6. Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require  
Scanning to Email  
authentication.  
You can scan and send an image as an email attachment. You first need to  
set up your email account in Embedded Web Service. See "Setting up an e-  
7. Enter the SMTP server login name and password.  
8. Click Apply.  
If the authentication method of SMTP server is  
POP3beforeSMTP, check the box next to SMTP Requires POP3  
Before SMTP Authentication.  
Before scanning, you can set the scan options for your scan job. See "Changing  
1. Ensure that your printer is connected to a network.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF, or place a single original face  
down on the scanner glass.  
a. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host  
name.  
b. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. The default  
For details about loading an original, see "Loading originals" on  
port number is 25.  
3. Press Scan/Email.  
Setting up an FTP server  
4. Press the left/right arrow until Scan to Email appears on the bottom line  
of the display and press OK.  
To use an FTP server, you need to set up parameters to access the FTP  
servers using Embedded Web Service.  
5. Enter the recipient’s email address and press OK.  
If you have set up Address Book, you can use a speed button or a speed email  
or group email number to retrieve an address from memory. See "Setting up  
1. Enter your printer’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go  
to access the web site of your printer.  
2. Click Machine Settings and FTP Setup.  
3. Click Server List.  
4. Click Add.  
5. Select the index number, from 1 to 20.  
6. Enter a name in Alias for the Setup for the corresponding Server  
List entry. This name will be displayed on your printer.  
7. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
6. To enter additional addresses, press OK when Yes appears and repeat  
step 5.  
To continue to the next step, press the left/right arrow to select No and  
press OK.  
7. If the display asks if you want to send the email to your account, press  
the left/right arrow to select Yes or No and press OK.  
8. Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.  
9. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 21.  
10. Check the box next to Anonymous if you want the FTP server to  
permit access to unauthorized persons. It is unchecked by default.  
11. Enter the login name and password.  
12. Enter the Scan File Folder under FTP directory for saving the  
scanned image.  
13. Click Apply.  
This prompt does not appear if you have activated the Send To  
Self option in the email account setup.  
8. Enter an email subject and press OK.  
9. Press the left/right arrow until the file format you want appears and press  
OK or Start.  
The printer begins scanning and then sends the email.  
10. If the printer asks if you want to log off your account, press the left/right  
arrow to select Yes or No and press OK.  
11. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
38 | Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
1. Press Scan/Email.  
Scanning to an FTP server  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Scan Feature appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the scan type you want appears and press  
OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the scan setting option you want appears  
and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK.  
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set other setting options.  
You can scan an image and then upload it to an FTP server. You need to  
set up parameters for access to FTP servers from Embedded Web Service.  
Before scanning, you can set the scan options for your scan job. See "Changing  
1. Ensure that your printer is connected to a network.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF or place a single original on the  
scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see "Loading originals" on  
7. When you have finished, press Stop/Clear (  
)
to return to Ready mode.  
3. Press Scan/Email.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until Scan to FTP appears on the bottom line  
of the display and press OK.  
5. Enter the user ID and press OK.  
6. Enter the password and press OK.  
CHANGING THE DEFAULT SCAN SETTINGS  
To avoid having to customize the scan settings for each job, you can set up  
default scan settings for each scan type.  
1. Press Scan/Email.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Scan Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
7. Press the left/right arrow until the FTP server you want appears and  
press OK or Start.  
3. Press OK when Change Default appears.  
8. Press the left/right arrow until the file type you want appears and press  
OK or Start.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the scan type you want appears and press OK  
.
The printer begins scanning and then sends the file to the specified  
server.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the scan setting option you want appears  
and press OK.  
6. Press the left/right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK.  
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to change other settings.  
Scanning to an SMB server  
You can scan an image and then send it to an SMB server. You need to set  
up parameters for access to SMB servers from Embedded Web Service.  
8. To change the default settings for other scan types, press Back (  
)
and repeat from step 4.  
9. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Before scanning, you can set the scan options for your scan job. See  
PRINTING SCAN CONFIRMATION REPORT  
AUTOMATICALLY  
You can set your printer to print a confirmation report showing whether a  
transmission was successful, how many pages were sent, and more. The  
report shows the job of scanning and sending it via SMB and FTP.  
1. Ensure that your printer is connected to a network.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF or place a single original on the  
scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see "Loading originals" on  
1. Press Scan/Email.  
3. Press Scan/Email.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Scan Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until Scan to SMB appears on the bottom line  
of the display and press OK.  
3. Press OK when Send Report appears.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the scan setting option you want appears  
and press OK.  
5. Enter the user ID and press OK.  
6. Enter the password and press OK.  
7. Press the left/right arrow until the SMB server you want appears and  
press OK or Start.  
On-Error: Only in case of error occurrence, the printer prints the report.  
On: The report is printed whether a job successfully completed or  
failed.  
8. Press the left/right arrow until the file format you want appears and press  
OK or Start.  
Off: No report is printed after completing a job.  
The printer begins scanning and then sends the file to the specified  
server.  
5. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
SETTING UP ADDRESS BOOK  
CHANGING THE SETTINGS FOR EACH SCAN JOB  
You can set up Address Book with the email addresses you use frequently via  
Embedded Web Service and then easily and quickly enter email addresses by  
Your printer provides you with the following setting options to allow you to  
customize your scan jobs.  
entering the location numbers assigned to them in Address Book  
.
Scan Size: Sets the image size.  
Original Type: Sets the original document’s type.  
Resolution: Sets the image resolution.  
Scan Color: Sets the color mode.  
Scan Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved. If  
you select TIFF or PDF, you can select to scan multiple pages.  
Depending on the selected scan type, this option may not appear.  
Registering speed email numbers  
1. Enter your printer’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to  
access the web site of your printer.  
2. Click Machine Settings and E-mail Setup.  
3. Click Individual Address Book and Add.  
To customize the settings before starting a scan job:  
Scanning | 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
4. Select a location number and enter the user name and e-mail address  
You can also search through memory for an entry by pressing Address  
you want.  
5. Click Apply.  
Group email numbers  
To use a group email entry, you need to search for and select it from  
memory.  
You can also click Import and obtain your address book from your  
computer.  
When you are prompted to enter a destination address while sending an  
Configuring group email numbers  
Enter your printer’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to  
email, press Address Book  
access the web site of your printer.  
Global email addresses  
To use a global email addresses in the LDAP server, you need to search  
for and select it from memory.  
1. Click Machine Settings and E-mail Setup.  
2. Click Group Address Book and Add.  
3. Select a group number and enter the group name you want.  
4. Select speed email numbers that will be included in the group.  
5. Click Apply.  
When you are prompted to enter a destination address while sending an  
email, press Address Book  
Retrieving global email addresses from the LDAP  
server  
You can use not only local addresses stored in your printer's memory but  
also ones in the LDAP server. To use the global addresses, configure the  
LDAP server first via Embedded Web Service as following:  
Searching address book for an entry  
There are two ways to search for an address in memory. You can either  
scan from A to Z sequentially or search by entering the first letters of the  
name associated with the address.  
Searching sequentially through memory  
1. If necessary, press Scan/Email.  
1. Enter your printer’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to  
access the web site of your printer.  
2. Click Machine Settings, LDAP Server Setup.  
3. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
2. Press Address Book  
until Search & Send appears on the  
bottom line of the display and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the number category you want  
appears and press OK.  
4. Press OK when All appears.  
4. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
5. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 389.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the name and address you want  
appears. You can search upwards or downwards through the entire  
memory in alphabetical order.  
6. Enter Search Root Directory. The top search level of the LDAP  
directory tree.  
7. Select Authentication method. Method of LDAP server login.  
Anonymous: This is used to bind with NULL password and login ID  
(Password and login ID are grayed in Embedded Web Service).  
Simple: This is used to bind with the login ID and password in  
Embedded Web Service.  
Searching with a particular first letter  
1. If necessary, press Scan/Email.  
2. Press Address Book  
until Search & Send appears on the  
8. Put a check mark of Append Root to Base DN for adding Base DN to  
bottom line of the display and press OK.  
login name.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the number category you want  
appears and press OK.  
9. Enter your login name, password, maximum number of search results  
and search timeout.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until ID appears and press OK.  
5. Enter the first few letters of the name you want and press OK.  
6. Press the left/right arrow until the name you want appears and press  
OK.  
LDAP Referral: LDAP client will search referral server in case  
LDAP server has no data to reply of query and LDAP server has  
any referral server.  
10. Select Serach Name Order that you want.  
11. Put a check mark of "From:" Field Security Options.  
12. Click Add.  
Printing address book  
You can check your Address Book  
settings by printing a list.  
1. Press Address Book  
display.  
2. Press OK.  
until Print appears on the bottom line of the  
Using address book entries  
To retrieve an email address, use the following ways:  
Speed email numbers  
When you are prompted to enter a destination address while sending an  
email, enter the speed email number at which you stored the address  
you want.  
A list showing your speed button settings, and the speed/group email  
entries print out.  
For a one-digit speed email location, press and hold the  
corresponding digit button from the number keypad.  
For a two- or three-digit speed email location, press the first digit  
button(s) and then hold down the last digit button.  
40 | Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
SCAN ON BOTH SIDES OF PAPER  
By using the Duplex ( ) button on your printer, you can set the printer to  
Y
X
scan on both sides of paper.  
1. Press Duplex ( ).  
Y
X
2. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you want appears.  
Off: Scans in Normal mode.  
2 Side: Scans both sides of the original.  
2 ->1Side ROT2: Scans both sides of the original and prints each one on  
a separate sheet, but the information on the back side of the printout is  
rotated 180°.  
3. Press OK to save your selection.  
If the mode is enabled, the Duplex ( ) button is backlit.  
Y
X
Scanning | 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
basic printing  
This chapter explains common printing tasks.  
This chapter includes:  
PRINTING A DOCUMENT  
Your printer allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or Linux  
applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending  
on the application you use.  
For details about printing, see the Software section.  
CANCELING A PRINT JOB  
If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, such as the printer  
group in Windows, delete the job as follows:  
1. Click the Windows Start menu.  
2. For Windows 2000, select Settings and then Printers.  
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.  
For Windows Vista/2008, select Control Panel  
Sound Printers.  
Hardware and  
3. Double-click the Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP icon.  
4. From the Document menu, select Cancel.  
You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the printer  
icon at the bottom right corner of the Windows desktop.  
You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop/Clear ( ) on the  
control panel.  
42 | Basic printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
faxing  
This chapter gives you information about using your printer as a fax printer.  
This chapter includes:  
1. Press Resolution.  
2. Press Resolution or the left/right arrow until the option you want  
It is recommended that you use traditional analog phone services  
(PSTN: public switched telephone network) when connecting  
telephone lines to use Fax. If you use other Internet services (DSL,  
ISDN, VolP), you can improve the connection quality by using the  
Micro-filter. The Micro-filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals and  
improves connection quality or Internet quality. Since the DSL Micro-  
filter is not provided with the printer, contact your Internet Service  
provider for use on DSL Micro-filter.  
appears.  
3. Press OK to save your selection.  
Recommended resolution settings for different original document types  
are described in the table below:  
MODE  
Standard  
RECOMMENDED FOR:  
Originals with normal sized characters.  
Fine  
Originals containing small characters or thin  
lines or originals printed using a dot-matrix  
printer.  
Super Fine  
Originals containing extremely fine detail. Super  
Fine mode is enabled only if the printer with  
which you are communicating also supports the  
Super Fine resolution.  
1 Line port  
2 Micro filter  
3 DSL modem / Telephone line  
For memory transmission, Super Fine  
mode is not available. The resolution  
setting is automatically changed to  
Fine.  
SENDING A FAX  
When your printer is set to Super Fine  
resolution and the fax printer with which  
you are communicating does not  
support Super Fine resolution, the  
printer transmits using the highest  
resolution mode supported by the other  
fax printer.  
Setting the fax header  
In some countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on  
any fax you send. The printer ID, containing your telephone number and  
name or company name, will be printed at the top of each page sent from  
your printer.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
3. Press OK when Machine ID appears.  
4. Enter your name or the company name using the number keypad. You  
can enter alphanumeric characters using the number keypad, and  
include special symbols by pressing the 0 button. For details on how to  
Photo Fax  
Originals containing shades of gray or  
photographs.  
The resolution setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the  
Darkness  
You can select the default contrast mode to fax your originals lighter or  
5. Press OK to save the ID.  
darker.  
6. Press the left/right arrow until Machine Fax No appears and press OK.  
7. Enter your fax number using the number keypad and press OK.  
1. Press Fax.  
2. Press Menu ( ), and then OK when Fax Feature appears on the  
bottom line of the display.  
3. Press OK when Darkness appears.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the option you want appears and press  
OK.  
8. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Adjusting the document settings  
Before starting a fax, change the following settings according to your  
original’s status to get the best quality.  
5. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
The darkness setting is applied to the current fax job. To change  
Resolution  
The default document settings produce good results when using typical  
text-based originals. However, if you send originals that are of poor  
quality, or contain photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce  
a higher quality Fax.  
Faxing | 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Sending a fax automatically  
Automatic redialing  
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you  
send a fax, the printer automatically redials the number every three minutes,  
up to seven times according to the factory default settings.  
1. Press Fax  
.
2. Load originals face up into the DADF, or place a single original face  
down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original. See "Loading originals" on  
Ready to Fax appears on the top line of the display.  
When the display shows Retry Redial?, press OK to redial the number  
without waiting. To cancel the automatic redialing, press Stop/Clear ( ).  
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial  
3. Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs.  
4. Enter the receiving fax printer’s number.  
You can use speed buttons, speed dial numbers, or group dial numbers.  
For details about storing and searching for a number. See "Setting up  
Redialing the last number  
To redial the number you called last:  
1. Press Redial/Pause.  
5. Press Color Start ( ) or Black Start ( ) .  
2. When an original is loaded in the DADF, the printer automatically begins  
to send.  
6. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another  
page. Load another original and press OK.  
7. When you have finished, select No at the Another Page? prompt.  
After the number is dialed, the printer begins sending the fax when the  
receiving fax printer answers.  
If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another  
page. Load another original and press OK. When you have finished,  
select No at the Another Page? prompt.  
Sending faxes on both sides of paper  
You can set the printer to send faxes on both sides of paper.  
When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop/Clear ( ) at any time  
while sending.  
1. Press Fax  
.
Sending a fax manually  
2. Press Duplex ( ).  
Y
X
1. Press Fax  
.
3. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you want appears.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF, or place a single original face  
down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original. See "Loading originals" on  
3. Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs. See  
Off: Send faxes in Normal mode.  
2 Side: Send faxes on both sides of the original.  
2 ->1Side ROT2: Send faxes on both sides of the original and prints  
each one on a separate sheet, but the information on the back side  
of the printout is rotated 180°.  
4. Press OK to save your selection.  
4. Press On Hook Dial ( ). You hear a dial tone.  
If the mode is enabled, the Duplex ( ) button is backlit.  
5. Enter the receiving fax printer’s number.  
Y
X
You can use speed buttons, speed dial numbers, or group dial numbers.  
For details about storing and searching for a number. See "Setting up  
RECEIVING A FAX  
6. Press Color Start ( ) or Black Start ( ) when you hear a high-  
Selecting the paper tray  
pitched fax signal from the remote fax printer.  
After loading the print media for fax output, you have to select the paper tray  
you will use for the fax reception.  
When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop/Clear ( ) at any time  
while sending.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Paper Setup appears and press OK  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Paper Source appears and press OK  
4. Press the left/right arrow until Fax Tray appears and press OK  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the paper tray you want appears and  
press OK  
.
Confirming a transmission  
When the last page of your original has been sent successfully, the printer  
beeps and returns to Ready mode.  
.
.
.
When something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message  
appears on the display. For a list of error messages and their meanings.  
.
message, press Stop/Clear ( ) to clear the message and try to send the  
6. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
fax again.  
Changing receiving modes  
1. Press Fax.  
You can set your printer to print a confirmation report automatically each  
time sending a fax is completed. For further details, see "Send Report" on  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK  
.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Receiving appears and press OK  
.
4. Press OK when Receive Mode appears.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the fax reception mode you want appears.  
In Fax mode, the printer answers an incoming fax call and  
44 | Faxing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
immediately goes into the fax reception mode.  
Receiving automatically in Ans/Fax mode  
To use this mode, you must attach an answering printer to the EXT socket  
on the back of your printer.  
In Tel mode, you can receive a fax by pressing On Hook Dial (  
)
and then Color Start ( ) or Black Start ( ) . You can also pick up  
the handset of the extension phone and then press the remote  
If the caller leaves a message, the answering printer stores the message as  
it would normally. If your printer detects a fax tone on the line, it  
automatically starts to receive the fax.  
In Ans/Fax mode, an answering printer attached to your printer  
answers an incoming call, and the caller can leave a message on the  
answering printer. If the fax printer senses a fax tone on the line, the  
printer automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax. See  
Pattern Detection (DRPD) feature. Distinctive Ring is a telephone  
company service which enables an user to use a single telephone  
line to answer several different telephone numbers. For further  
If you have set your printer to Ans/Fax mode and your answering  
printer is switched off, or no answering printer is connected to EXT  
socket, your printer automatically goes into Fax mode after a  
predefined number of rings.  
If your answering printer has a user-selectable ring counter, set the  
printer to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.  
If you are in Tel mode (manual reception) when the answering  
printer is connected to your printer, you must switch off the  
answering printer, or the outgoing message from the answering  
printer will interrupt your phone conversation.  
6. Press OK to save your selection.  
7. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Receiving faxes using DRPD mode  
When the memory is full, the printer can no longer receive any  
incoming fax. Secure free memory to resume by removing data  
stored in the memory.  
This setting may not be available depending on your country. Distinctive  
Ring is a telephone company service which enables an user to use a single  
telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. The  
particular number someone uses to call you is identified by different ringing  
patterns, which consist of various combinations of long and short ringing  
sounds. This feature is often used by answering services who answer  
telephones for many different clients and need to know which number  
someone is calling in on to properly answer the phone.  
To use the Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering printer to the EXT  
socket on the back of your printer.  
If you do not want other people to view your received documents,  
you can use secure receiving mode. In this mode, all of the  
received faxes are stored in memory. See "Receiving in secure  
Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) feature, your fax  
printer can learn the ring pattern you designate to be answered by the fax  
printer. Unless you change it, this ringing pattern will continue to be  
recognized and answered as a fax call, and all other ringing patterns will be  
forwarded to the extension telephone or answering printer plugged into the  
EXT socket. You can easily suspend or change DRPD at any time.  
Receiving automatically in Fax mode  
Your printer is preset to Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a fax,  
the printer answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically  
receives the fax.  
Before using the DRPD option, Distinctive Ring service must be installed on  
your telephone line by the telephone company. To set up DRPD, you will  
need another telephone line at your location, or someone available to dial  
your fax number from outside.  
To change the number of rings. See "Ring To Answer" on page 48.  
Receiving manually in Tel mode  
You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial ( ) and then pressing  
Black Start ( ) or Color Start ( ) when you hear a fax tone from the  
remote printer.  
To set up the DRPD mode:  
1. Press Fax.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
The printer begins receiving a fax and returns to Ready mode when the  
reception is completed.  
display and press OK  
.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Receiving appears and press OK  
.
4. Press the left/right arrow until DRPD Mode appears and press OK  
Waiting Ring appears on the display.  
5. Call your fax number from another telephone. It is not necessary to  
place the call from a fax printer.  
6. When your printer begins to ring, do not answer the call. The printer  
requires several rings to learn the pattern.  
.
Receiving manually using an extension telephone  
This features works best when you are using an extension telephone  
connected to the EXT socket on the back of your printer. You can receive a  
fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone without  
going to the fax printer.  
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press  
the keys *9* on the extension phone. The printer receives the fax.  
When the printer completes learning, the display shows Completed  
DRPD Setup. If the DRPD setup fails, Error DRPD Ring appears.  
Press OK when DRPD Mode appears and start over from step 4.  
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the  
remote printer, try pressing *9* once again.  
7. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
*9* is the remote receive code preset at the factory. The first and the last  
asterisks are fixed, but you can change the middle number to whatever you  
wish. For details about changing the code. See "Rcv Start Code" on  
Faxing | 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
OTHER WAYS TO FAX  
DRPD must be set up again if you re-assign your fax number, or  
connect the printer to another telephone line.  
After DRPD has been set up, call your fax number again to verify  
that the printer answers with a fax tone. Then have a call placed to  
a different number assigned to that same line to be sure the call is  
forwarded to the extension telephone or answering printer plugged  
into the EXT socket.  
Sending a fax to multiple destinations  
You can use the Multiple Send feature, which allows you to send a fax to  
multiple locations. Originals are automatically stored in memory and sent to  
a remote station. After transmission, the originals are automatically erased  
from memory. You cannot send a color fax using this feature.  
1. Press Fax.  
Receiving in secure receiving mode  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF, or place a single original face  
down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see "Loading originals" on  
3. Adjust the document resolution and darkness to suit your fax needs. See  
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by  
unauthorized people. You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict  
printing of received faxes when the printer is unattended. In secure  
receiving mode, all incoming faxes go into memory. When the mode is  
deactivated, any stored faxes are printed.  
4. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the  
Activating secure receiving mode  
1. Press Fax.  
display and press OK  
5. Press the left/right arrow until Multi Send appears and press OK  
6. Enter the number of the first receiving fax printer and press OK  
.
.
2. Press Menu ( ) and then press OK when Fax Feature appears on the  
.
bottom line of the display.  
You can use speed buttons, speed dial numbers. You can enter Group  
Dial Number using Address Book Button. For details, see "Setting up  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Secure Receive appears and press OK  
4. Press the left/right arrow until On appears and press OK  
5. Enter a four-digit password you want to use and press OK  
.
.
7. Enter the second fax number and press OK.  
The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document.  
8. To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes appears and repeat  
.
You can activate secure receiving mode without setting a  
password, but cannot protect your faxes.  
steps 6 and 7. You can add up to 10 destinations.  
6. Re-enter the password to confirm it and press OK  
.
Once you entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another  
group dial numbers anymore.  
7. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
When a fax is received in secure receiving mode, your printer stores it in  
memory and shows Secure Receive to let you know that there is a fax  
received.  
9. When you have finished entering fax numbers, press the left/right arrow  
to select No at the Another No.? prompt and press OK.  
The original is scanned into memory before transmission. The display  
shows memory capacity and the number of pages being stored in  
memory.  
Printing received faxes  
1. Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 through 3 in  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Print appears and press OK  
3. Enter the four-digit password and press OK  
10. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another  
pages. Load another original and press OK.  
.
.
When you have finished, select No at the Another Page? prompt.  
The printer begins sending the fax to the numbers you entered in the  
order in which you entered them.  
The printer prints all of the faxes stored in memory.  
Deactivating secure receiving mode  
1. Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 through 3 in  
Sending a delayed fax  
You can set your printer to send a fax at a later time when you will not be  
present. You cannot send a color fax using this feature.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Off appears and press OK  
.
3. Enter the four-digit password and press OK  
.
1. Press Fax  
.
The mode is deactivated and the printer prints all faxes stored in  
memory.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF, or place a single original face  
down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original, see "Loading originals" on  
3. Adjust the document resolution and darkness to suit your fax needs. See  
4. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Receiving faxes in memory  
Since your printer is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you  
are making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying or  
printing, your printer stores incoming faxes in its memory. Then, as soon as  
you finish copying or printing, the printer automatically prints the fax.  
4. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until Delay Send appears and press OK  
6. Enter the number of the receiving printer using the number keypad.  
You can use speed buttons, speed dial numbers. You can enter Group  
Dial Number using Address Book Button.For details. See "Setting up  
.
Also, your printer receives faxes and stores them in its memory when there  
is no paper in the tray or no toner in the installed toner cartridge.  
46 | Faxing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
7. Press OK to confirm the number. The display asks you to enter another  
3. Adjust the document resolution and darkness to suit your fax needs.  
fax number to which to send the document.  
8. To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes appears and repeat  
4. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
steps 6 and 7. You can add up to 10 destinations.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until Priority Send appears and press OK.  
6. Enter the number of the receiving printer.  
Once you entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another  
group dial numbers anymore.  
You can use speed buttons, speed dial numbers, or group dial numbers.  
7. Press OK to confirm the number.  
9. When you have finished entering fax numbers, press the left/right arrow  
to select No at the Another No.? prompt and press OK.  
10. Enter the job name you want and press OK.  
8. Enter the job name you want and press OK.  
The original is scanned into memory before transmission. The display  
shows memory capacity and the number of pages being stored in  
memory.  
For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters. See "Entering  
11. Enter the time using the number keypad and press OK, or Black Start.  
9. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another  
page. Load another original and press OK.  
If you set a time earlier than the current time, the fax will be sent at  
that time on the following day.  
When you have finished, select No at the Another Page? prompt.  
The printer shows the number being dialed and begins sending the fax.  
The original is scanned into memory before transmission. The display  
shows memory capacity and the number of pages being stored in  
memory.  
Forwarding faxes  
You can forward your incoming and outgoing faxes to another fax printer or  
email address.  
12. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another  
page. Load another original and press OK.  
When you have finished, select No at the Another Page? prompt.  
The printer returns to Ready mode. The display reminds you that you  
are in Ready mode and that a delayed fax is set.  
Forwarding sent faxes to another fax printer  
You can set the printer to send copies of all outgoing faxes to a specified  
destination, in addition to the fax numbers you entered.  
Adding pages to a delayed fax  
1. Press Fax.  
You can add pages to the delayed transmissions previously reserved in  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.  
4. Press OK when Fax appears.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until Send Forward appears and press OK.  
6. Press the left/right arrow to select On and press OK.  
7. Enter the number of the fax printer to which faxes are to be sent and  
press OK.  
your printer’s memory.  
1. Load the originals to be added and adjust document settings.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
3. Press OK when Add Page appears.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the fax job you want appears and  
press OK.  
The printer scans the original into memory and shows the total  
number of pages and the number of the added pages.  
8. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax printer.  
Canceling a delayed fax  
1. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Cancel Job appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the fax job you want appears and  
press OK.  
Forwarding sent faxes to email address  
You can set the printer to send copies of all outgoing faxes to a specified  
destination, in addition to the email address you entered.  
1. Press Fax.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
4. Press OK when Yes appears.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until E-mail appears and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until Send Forward appears and press OK.  
6. Press the left/right arrow to select On and press OK.  
7. Enter your email address and press OK.  
8. Enter the email address to which faxes are to be sent and press OK.  
The selected fax is deleted from memory.  
Sending a priority fax  
Using the Priority Fax feature, a high priority fax can be sent ahead of  
reserved operations. The original is scanned into memory and immediately  
transmitted when the current operation is finished. In addition, priority  
transmission will interrupt a Multiple Send operation between stations (i.e.,  
when the transmission to station A ends, before transmission to station B  
begins) or between redial attempts.  
9. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified email  
address.  
1. Press Fax.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF, or place a single original face  
down on the scanner glass.  
Forwarding received faxes to another fax printer  
You can set your printer to forward incoming faxes to another fax  
number during a specified time period. When a fax arrives at your  
printer, it is stored in memory. Then, the printer dials the fax number that  
you have specified and sends the fax.  
For details about loading an original, see "Loading originals" on  
Faxing | 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
1. Press Fax.  
Sending options  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.  
4. Press OK when Fax appears.  
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
Redial Times  
You can specify the number of redial attempts. If  
you enter 0, the printer will not redial.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until Rcv. Forward appears and press OK.  
6. Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.  
To set the printer to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been  
completed, select Forward&Print.  
7. Enter the number of the fax printer to which faxes are to be sent and  
press OK.  
8. Enter the starting time and press OK.  
9. Enter the ending time and press OK.  
Redial Term  
Prefix Dial  
Your printer can automatically redial a remote fax  
printer if it was busy. You can set an interval  
between attempts.  
You can set a prefix of up to five digits. This  
number dials before any automatic dial number is  
started. It is useful for accessing a PABX  
exchange.  
10. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
ECM Mode  
This mode helps with poor line quality and makes  
sure any faxes you send are sent smoothly to any  
other ECM-equipped fax printer. Sending a fax  
using ECM may take more time.  
Subsequent received faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax  
printer.  
Forwarding received faxes to email address  
You can set your printer to forward incoming faxes to the email address  
you entered.  
Send Report  
You can set your printer to print a confirmation  
report showing whether a transmission was  
successful, how many pages were sent, and  
more. The available options are On, Off, and On-  
Error, which prints only when a transmission is  
not successful.  
1. Press Fax.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until E-mail appears and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until Rcv. Forward appears and press OK.  
6. Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.  
To set the printer to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been  
completed, select Forward&Print.  
Image TCR  
This function allows users to know what fax  
messages have been sent by showing sent  
messages in the transmission report.  
The first page of the message is turned into an  
image file than is printed on the transmission  
report so the users can see what messages have  
been sent.  
However, you can not use this function when  
sending fax without saving the data in the  
memory.  
7. Enter your email address and press OK.  
8. Enter the email address to which faxes are to be sent and press OK.  
9. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified email  
address.  
Dial Mode  
This setting may not be available depending on  
your country. If you cannot reach this option, your  
printer does not support this feature.  
You can set the dial mode for your printer to either  
tone dialling or pulse dialling. If you have a public  
telephone system or a private branch  
FAX SETUP  
exchnage(PBX) system, you may need to select  
Pulse. Contact your local telephone company if  
you are not sure which dial mode to use.  
If you select Pulse, some phone system features  
might not be available. It can also take longer to  
dial a fax or phone number.  
Changing the fax setup options  
Your printer provides you with various user-selectable options for setting up  
the fax system. You can change the default settings for your preferences  
and needs.  
To change the fax setup options:  
1. Press Fax.  
Receiving options  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow to select Sending or Receiving and press OK.  
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the menu item you want appears and  
press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the desired status appears or enter the  
value for the option you have selected, and press OK.  
Receive Mode  
You can select the default fax receiving mode. For  
details on receiving faxes in each mode. See  
Ring To Answer You can specify the number of times the printer  
6. If necessary, repeat steps 4 through 5.  
rings before answering an incoming call.  
7. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Stamp RCV  
Name  
This option allows the printer to automatically print  
the page number, and the date and time of  
reception at the bottom of each page of a  
received fax.  
48 | Faxing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
1. Press Fax.  
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Change Default appears and press OK.  
4. Press OK when Resolution appears.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the resolution you want appears and press  
OK.  
Rcv Start Code  
This code allows you to initiate fax reception from  
an extension phone plugged into the EXT socket  
on the back of the printer. If you pick up the  
extension phone and hear fax tones, enter the  
code. It is preset to *9* at the factory.  
6. Press the left/right arrow until Darkness appears and press OK.  
7. Press the left/right arrow until the darkness you want appears and press  
OK.  
Auto Reduction  
When receiving a fax containing pages as long as  
or longer than the paper loaded in the paper tray,  
the printer can reduce the size of the original to fit  
the size of the paper loaded in the printer. Turn on  
this feature if you want to automatically reduce an  
incoming page.  
8. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
With this feature set to Off, the printer cannot  
reduce the original to fit onto one page. The  
original will be divided and printed in actual size  
on two or more pages.  
Printing sent fax report automatically  
You can set the printer to print a report with detailed information about the  
previous 50 communication operations, including time and dates.  
1. Press Fax.  
Discard Size  
When receiving a fax containing pages as long as  
or longer than the paper in your printer, you can  
set the printer to discard a specific length from the  
end of the received fax. The printer will print the  
received fax on one or more sheets of paper,  
minus the data that would have been on the  
specified discard segment.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Auto Report appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until On appears and press OK.  
5. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
When the received fax contains pages larger than  
the paper in your printer, and Auto Reduction  
has been turned on, the printer will reduce the fax  
to fit on the existing paper, and nothing will be  
discarded.  
Setting up address book  
You can set up Address Book with the fax numbers you use most  
frequently. Your printer provides you with the following features for setting  
up Address Book:  
Junk Fax Setup  
This setting may not be available depending on  
your country. Using this feature, the system will  
not accept faxes sent from remote stations whose  
numbers are stored in the memory as junk fax  
numbers. This feature is useful for blocking any  
unwanted faxes.  
Speed buttons  
Speed/Group dial numbers  
Before beginning to store fax numbers, ensure that your printer is in  
Fax mode.  
When you turn on this feature, you can access the  
following options to set junk fax numbers.  
Speed buttons  
The 15 speed buttons on the control panel lets you store frequently-used  
fax numbers. You will be able to enter a fax number with the touch of a  
button. By utilizing the Shift button, you can store up to 30 numbers on  
the speed buttons.  
Add: Allows you to set up to 10 fax numbers.  
Delete: Allows you to delete the desired junk  
fax number.  
There are two ways to assign numbers to speed buttons. Examine the  
procedures below and use the appropriate way which you prefer:  
Delete All: Allows you to delete all junk fax  
numbers.  
Registering after pressing a speed button  
1. Press Fax.  
2. Press one of the speed buttons.  
3. Press OK when Yes appears.  
DRPD Mode  
Duplex Print  
This mode enables a user to use a single  
telephone line to answer several different  
telephone numbers. In this menu, you can set the  
printer to recognize which ring patterns to answer.  
For details about this feature. see "Receiving  
4. Enter the name you want and press OK.  
For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters. see "Entering  
5. Enter the fax number you want to store and press OK.  
Long Edge: Prints pages to be read like a  
book.  
Short Edge: Prints pages to be read by  
flipping like a note pad.  
Off: Prints received fax on one sides of a  
Registering after entering a number first  
1. Press Fax.  
paper.  
2. Enter the fax number you want to store.  
3. Press one of the speed buttons.  
4. Press OK when Yes appears.  
Changing the default document settings  
The fax options, including resolution and darkness, can be set to the most  
frequently used modes. When you send a fax, the default settings are used  
if they are not changed by using the corresponding button and menu.  
If you press a speed button already assigned, the display asks if  
you want to overwrite. Press OK to confirm Yes and continue. To  
start over with another speed button, select No.  
5. Enter the name you want and press OK.  
Faxing | 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters. See "Entering  
6. Press OK to confirm the number.  
5. Enter a speed dial number and press OK.  
6. Press OK when speed dial information appears correctly.  
7. Press OK when Yes appears.  
8. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to include other speed dial numbers into the  
Using speed buttons  
When you are prompted to enter a fax number while sending a fax:  
group.  
9. When you have finished, press the left/right arrow to select No at the  
Another No.? prompt and press OK.  
To retrieve a number from speed buttons 1 to 15, press the  
corresponding speed button and press OK.  
To retrieve a number from speed buttons 16 to 30, press Shift and  
10. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
then the corresponding speed button, and press OK.  
Editing a group dial number  
You can delete a specific entry from a group or add a new number to the  
selected group.  
1. Press Address Book until New & Edit appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
Speed dial numbers  
You can store up to 240 frequently-used fax numbers in speed dial  
numbers.  
Registering a speed dial number  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Group Dial appears and press OK.  
3. Enter the group dial number you want to edit and press OK.  
4. Enter the speed dial number you want to add or delete and press  
1. Press Fax.  
2. Press Address Book until New & Edit appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
OK.  
3. Press OK when Speed Dial appears.  
If you entered a new speed dial number, Add? appears.  
If you enter a speed dial number stored in the group, Delete?  
appears.  
4. Enter a speed dial number between 0 and 239 and press OK.  
If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display  
shows the name to allow you to change it. To start over with another  
speed dial number, press Back ( ).  
5. Press OK to add or delete the number.  
6. Press OK when Yes appears to add or delete more numbers and  
5. Enter the name you want and press OK.  
repeat steps 4 and 5.  
7. When you have finished, press the left/right arrow to select No at the  
Another No.? prompt and press OK.  
For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters. See "Entering  
6. Enter the fax number you want and press OK.  
8. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
7. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Using group dial numbers  
Editing speed dial numbers  
To use a group dial entry, you need to search for and select it from  
memory.  
When you are prompted to enter a fax number while sending a fax,  
press Address Book. See below.  
1. Press Address Book until New & Edit appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
2. Press OK when Speed Dial appears.  
3. Enter the speed dial number you want to edit and press OK.  
4. Change the name and press OK.  
Searching Address Book for an entry  
There are two ways to search for a number in memory. You can either  
scan from A to Z sequentially, or you can search by entering the first  
letters of the name associated with the number.  
5. Change the fax number and press OK.  
6. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Using speed dial numbers  
Searching sequentially through the memory  
When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a  
fax, enter the speed dial number at which you stored the number you  
want.  
1. If necessary, press Fax.  
2. Press Address Book until Search & Dial appears on the bottom line  
of the display and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the number category you want  
appears and press OK.  
4. Press OK when All appears.  
For a one-digit (0-9) speed dial number, press and hold the  
corresponding digit button on the number keypad.  
For a two- or three-digit speed dial number, press the first digit  
button(s) and then hold down the last digit button.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the name and number you want  
appears. You can search upwards or downwards through the entire  
memory in alphabetical order.  
Group dial numbers  
Searching with a particular first letter  
1. If necessary, press Fax.  
2. Press Address Book until Search & Dial appears on the bottom line  
of the display and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the number category you want  
If you frequently send the same document to several destinations, you  
can group these destinations and set them under a group dial number.  
You can then use a group dial number to send a document to all of the  
destinations within the group. You can set up to 200 (0 through 199)  
group dial numbers using the destination’s existing speed dial numbers.  
Registering a group dial number  
appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until ID appears and press OK.  
5. Enter the first few letters of the name you want and press OK.  
6. Press the left/right arrow until the name you want appears and press  
OK.  
1. Press Fax.  
2. Press Address Book until New & Edit appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Group Dial appears and press OK.  
4. Enter a group dial number between 0 and 199 and press OK.  
50 | Faxing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Deleting a Address Book entry  
You can delete entries in Address Book one by one.  
1. Press Address Book until Delete appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until the number category you want  
appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the searching method you want  
appears and press OK.  
Select Search All to search for an entry by scanning through all  
entries in Address Book.  
Select Search ID to search for an entry by the first few letters of the  
name.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the name you want appears and press  
OK.  
Or, enter the first letters and press OK. Press the left/right arrow until  
the name you want appears and press OK.  
5. Press OK.  
6. Press OK when Yes appears to confirm the deletion.  
7. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Printing Address Book  
1. You can check your Address Book settings by printing a list.  
1. Press Address Book until Print appears on the bottom line of the  
display.  
2. Press OK. A list showing your speed button settings, and speed dial  
and group dial entries prints out.  
Faxing | 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
using USB flash memory  
This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your printer.  
This chapter includes:  
Insert a USB memory device into the USB connector on the front of your  
printer.  
ABOUT USB MEMORY  
USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to  
give you more room for storing documents, presentations, downloaded  
music and videos, high resolution photographs, or whatever other files you  
want to store or move.  
You can do the following on your printer using a USB memory device:  
Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device.  
Print data stored on a USB memory device.  
Back up Address Book  
/ Phone Book entries and the system  
settings of your printer.  
Restore backup files to the printer’s memory.  
Format the USB memory device.  
Check the available memory space.  
PLUGGING IN A USB MEMORY DEVICE  
The USB connector on the front of your printer is designed for USB V1.1  
and USB V2.0 memory devices. Your printer supports USB memory devices  
with FAT16/ FAT32 and sector size of 512 bytes.  
Check your USB memory device’s file system from your dealer.  
You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type  
connector.  
Do not remove the USB memory device while the printer is in  
operation, or writing to or reading from USB memory. The printer  
warranty does not cover damage caused by use’s misuse.  
If your USB memory device has certain features, such as security  
settings and password settings, your printer may not automatically  
detect it. For details about these features, see the device’s User’s  
Guide.  
SCANNING TO A USB MEMORY DEVICE  
You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB  
memory device. There are two ways of doing this: you can scan to the  
device using the default settings, or you can customize your own scan  
settings.  
Use only a metal/shielded USB memory device.  
Scanning  
1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB connector on your printer.  
2. Load originals face up into the DADF, or place a single original face  
down on the scanner glass.  
For details about loading an original. See "Loading originals" on  
3. Press Scan/Email.  
4. Press OK when Scan to USB appears on the bottom line of the display.  
5. Press OK, Color Start ( ) or Black Start ( ) when USB appears.  
Regardless of the button you press, the color mode is decided as  
scan another page.  
52 | Using USB flash memory  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
6. Press OK when Yes appears to scan more pages. Load an original and  
press Color Start ( ) or Black Start ( ).  
3. If you selected a file, skip to the next step.  
If you selected a folder, press the left/right arrow until the file you want  
appears.  
Regardless of the button you press, the color mode is decided as  
customized. See “Customizing scan to USB” on page 53.  
Otherwise, press the left/right arrow to select No and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow to select the number of copies to be printed or  
enter the number.  
5. Press OK, Color Start ( ) or Black Start ( ) to start printing the  
selected file.  
After scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory device from  
the printer.  
There are two types of mode as following:  
Customizing scan to USB  
OK or Color Start ( ) : Color print  
You can specify image size, file format, or color mode for each scanning to  
USB job.  
Black Start ( ) : Black and White print  
After printing the file, the display asks if you want to print another job.  
6. Press OK when Yes appears to print another job, and repeat from step 2.  
Otherwise, press the left/right arrow to select No and press OK.  
1. Press Scan/Email.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until Scan Feature appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
3. Press OK when USB Memory appears.  
7. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Can choose paper size and tray when printing. See "Setting the paper  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the setting option you want appears and  
press OK.  
You can set the following options:  
Scan Size: Sets the image size.  
Original Type: Sets the original document’s type.  
Resolution: Sets the image resolution.  
Scan Color: Sets the color mode. If you select Mono in this option,  
you cannot select JPEG in Scan Format.  
Scan Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved.  
When you select TIFF or PDF, you can select to scan multiple  
pages. If you select JPEG in this option, you cannot select Mono in  
Scan Color.  
BACKING UP DATA  
Data in the printer’s memory can be accidentally erased due to power failure  
or storage failure. Backup helps you protect your Address Book entries  
and the system settings by storing them as backup files on a USB memory  
device.  
Backing up data  
1. Insert the USB memory device into the USB connector on your printer.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
3. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until Export Setting appears and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the option you want appears.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK.  
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set other setting options.  
7. When you have finished, press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready  
mode.  
You can change the default scan settings. For details. See "Changing the  
Address Book: Backs up all Address Book entries.  
Setup Data: Backs up all system settings.  
6. Press OK to begin backing up the data.  
PRINTING FROM A USB MEMORY DEVICE  
The data is backed up to the USB memory.  
You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device. You can print  
TIFF, BMP, JPEG, PDF, and PRN files.  
7. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Direct Print option supported file types:  
Restoring data  
1. Insert the USB memory device on which the backup data is stored in to  
PRN: Dell PCL 6 compatible.  
PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when  
you print a document. The document will be saved as a PRN file, rather  
than printed on paper. Only PRN files created in this fashion can be  
printed directly from USB memory. See the Software Section to learn  
how to create a PRN file.  
the USB connector.  
2. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
3. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until Import Setting appears and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until the data type you want appears and press  
OK.  
6. Press the left/right arrow until the file containing the data you want to  
restore appears and press OK.  
7. Press OK when Yes appears to restore the backup file to the printer.  
BMP: BMP Uncompressed  
TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline  
JPEG: JPEG Baseline  
PDF: PDF 1.4 and below  
To print a document from a USB memory device:  
1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB connector on your printer. If  
8. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
one has already been inserted, press USB Print  
(
).  
Your printer automatically detects the device and reads data stored on it.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until the folder or file you want appears and  
press OK.  
If you see D in the front of a folder name, there are one or more files or  
folders in the selected folder.  
Using USB flash memory | 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
MANAGING USB MEMORY  
You can delete image files stored on a USB memory device one by one or  
all at once by reformatting the device.  
After deleting files or reformatting a USB memory device, files cannot  
be restored. Therefore, confirm that you no longer need the data  
before deleting it.  
Deleting an image file  
1. Insert the USB memory device into the USB connector on your printer.  
2. Press Scan/Email.  
3. Press OK when Scan to USB appears on the bottom line of the display.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until File Manage appears and press OK.  
5. Press OK when Delete appears.  
6. Press the left/right arrow until the folder or file you want appears and  
press OK.  
If you see D in the front of a folder name, there are one or more  
files or folders in the selected folder.  
If you selected a file, the display shows the size of the file for about  
2 seconds. Go to the next step.  
If you selected a folder, press the left/right arrow until the file you want to  
delete appears and press OK.  
7. Press OK when Yes appears to confirm your selection.  
8. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Formatting a USB memory device  
1. Insert the USB memory device into the USB connector on your printer.  
2. Press Scan/Email.  
3. Press OK when Scan to USB appears on the bottom line of the display.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until File Manage appears and press OK.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until Format appears and press OK.  
6. Press OK when Yes appears to confirm your selection.  
7. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Viewing the USB memory status  
You can check the amount of memory space available for scanning and  
saving documents.  
1. Insert the USB memory device into the USB connector on your printer.  
2. Press Scan/Email.  
3. Press OK when Scan to USB appears on the bottom line of the display.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until Check Space appears and press OK.  
The available memory space appears on the display.  
5. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to the Ready mode.  
54 | Using USB flash memory  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
maintenance  
This chapter provides information for maintaining your printer and the toner cartridge.  
This chapter includes:  
PRINTING REPORTS  
Your printer can provide various reports with useful information you will  
need. The following reports are available:  
REPORT/LIST  
Stored Job  
DESCRIPTION  
This list shows the current status of stored job on  
HDD.  
Completed Job  
Net Auth Log  
The completed job page shows the list of  
completed print jobs. The list contains up to 50 files  
from the latest print jobs.  
Some reports may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your printer.  
This list shows users and their IDs who logged in  
the domain.  
REPORT/LIST  
Configuration  
DESCRIPTION  
This list shows the status of the user-selectable  
options. You may print this list to confirm your  
changes after changing settings.  
Printing a report  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Report appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the report or list you want to print appears  
and press OK.  
To print all reports and lists, select All Report.  
4. Press OK when Yes appears to confirm printing.  
Supplies Info  
Address Book  
Send Report  
This list shows the current status of consumables  
in your printer.  
This list shows all of the fax numbers and email  
addresses currently stored in the printer’s memory.  
This report shows the fax number, the number of  
pages, the elapsed time of the job, the  
communication mode, and the communication  
results for a particular fax job.  
The selected information prints out.  
You can set up your printer to automatically print a  
ADJUSTING THE COLOR CONTRAST  
Sent Report  
This report shows information on the faxes and  
emails you have recently sent.  
You can set the printer to automatically print this  
report every 50 communications. see "Sending  
Color menu allows you to adjust the color setting.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press OK when Maintenance appears.  
Fax RCV Report  
Schedule Jobs  
This report shows information on the faxes you  
have recently received.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Color appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the menu you want appears on display  
and press OK.  
This list shows the documents currently stored for  
delayed faxes along with the starting time and type  
of each operation.  
Custom Color: Allows you to adjust contrast color by color. Default  
optimizes color automatically. Manual Adjust allows you to  
manually adjust the color contrast for each cartridge. Default setting  
is recommended for getting best color quality.  
Junk Fax Report  
This list shows the fax numbers specified as junk  
fax numbers. To add or delete numbers to or from  
this list, access the Junk Fax Setup menu.  
Auto Color Reg.: Allows you to adjust the position of print color  
texts or graphics to match the original file on your screen.  
Network Info.  
This list shows information on your printer’s  
network connection and configuration.  
If you have moved the printer, it is strongly recommended to operate  
this menu manually.  
NetScan Report  
This report shows information for the Network Scan  
records including IP address, time and date, the  
number of pages scanned, and results. This report is  
automatically printed every 50 network scan jobs.  
5. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
User Auth List  
This list shows authorized users who are allowed to  
use the email function.  
PCL Font List  
PS3 Font List  
You can print the PCL font list.  
You can print the PS3 font list.  
Maintenance | 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
USING TONER LOW ALERT  
CLEANING YOUR PRINTER  
To maintain print and scan quality, follow the cleaning procedures below  
each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print and scan quality  
problems occur.  
If toner in the cartridge has run out, a message informing user to change the  
toner cartridge appears. You can set the option for this message to appear  
or not.  
Cleaning the cabinet of the printer with cleaning materials  
containing large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or other strong  
substances can discolor or distort the cabinet.  
If your printer or its surrounding is contaminated with toner, we  
recommend you to use cloth or tissue dampened with water to  
clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blown into the air may  
be harmful.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press OK when Maintenance appears.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Toner Low Alert appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow to select Off.  
5. Press OK.  
6. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
Cleaning the outside  
Clean the cabinet of the printer with a soft lint-free cloth. You can dampen  
the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or  
into the printer.  
CLEARING MEMORY  
You can selectively clear information stored in your printer’s memory.  
Before clearing the memory, ensure that all fax jobs have been  
completed, or you will lose those jobs.  
Cleaning the inside  
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate  
inside the printer. This buildup can cause print quality problems, such as  
toner specks or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the printer clears or  
reduces these problems.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Clear Setting appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the item you want to clear appears.  
1. Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the printer to  
cool down.  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your printer.  
2. Using the handle, completely open the front cover.  
OPTIONS  
DESCRIPTION  
All Settings  
Clears all of the data stored in memory and resets all  
of your settings to the factory default.  
Fax Setup  
Restores all of the fax options to the factory default.  
Copy Setup  
Restores all of the copy options to the factory  
default.  
Scan Setup  
System Setup  
Network  
Restores all of the scan options to the factory  
default.  
Restores all of the system options to the factory  
default.  
Do not touch the green surface, the OPC drum or the front of the  
toner cartridge, with your hands or any other material. Use the  
handle on each cartridge in order to avoid touching this area.  
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt.  
If you leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes, the  
OPC drum can be exposed to light. This will cause damage to the  
OPC drum. Close the front cover should the installation need to  
be halted for any reason.  
Restores all of the network options to the factory  
default.  
Address Book  
Clears all of the fax number and email address  
entries stored in memory.  
Sent Report  
Clears all records of sent faxes and emails.  
Clears all records of received faxes.  
Fax RCV Report  
NetScan Report  
Clears the information on network scan sessions in  
memory.  
4. Press OK when Yes appears.  
5. Press OK again to confirm clearing.  
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to clear another item.  
7. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
56 | Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
3. Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the  
5. With a dry lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the  
cartridge from the printer.  
toner cartridges area and their cavities.  
When you open the front cover, be careful not to touch the  
underneath of the control panel (the lower part of the fuser unit). The  
temperature of the fuser unit might be high and could damage your  
skin.  
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash  
it in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.  
6. Locate the long strip of glass (LSU) inside the cartridge compartment,  
and gently swab the glass to see if dirt turns the white cotten black.  
When you open the front cover and work inside the printer, it is highly  
recommend that you remove the paper transfer belt first. Because the  
work you do could contaminate the paper transfer belt.  
4. Press the green release handle to release the paper transfer belt.  
Holding the handle on the paper transfer belt, lift it out of the printer.  
7. Reinstall all the compartments into the printer, and close the front cover.  
If the front cover is not completely closed, the printer will not operate.  
8. Plug in the power cord and turn the printer on.  
Maintenance | 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning the scan unit  
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We  
suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the  
day, as needed.  
MAINTAINING THE CARTRIDGE  
Toner cartridge storage  
To get the most from the toner cartridge, keep the following guidelines in  
mind:  
1. Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.  
2. Open the scanner lid.  
3. Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and DADF glass until it is clean  
Do not remove the toner cartridge from its package until ready for use.  
Do not refill the toner cartridge. The printer warranty does not cover  
damage caused by using a refilled cartridge.  
and dry.  
Store toner cartridges in the same environment as your printer.  
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for  
more than a few minutes.  
Expected cartridge life  
The life of the toner cartridge yield depends on the amount of toner that print  
jobs require. The actual number may also be different depending on the  
print density of the pages you print on, and the number of pages may be  
affected by operating environment, printing interval, media type, and media  
size. If you print a lot of graphics, you may need to change the cartridge  
more often.  
Redistributing toner  
1 Scanner lid  
2 Scanner glass  
3 White sheet  
4 DADF glass  
When a toner is low, faded or light areas may appear. It is possible that  
colored images may be printed with incorrect colors due to flawed mixing of  
toner colors when one of the colored toner cartridges is low on toner. You  
can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the toner.  
The toner-related message saying that the toner is low may appear on  
the display.  
4. Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean  
and dry.  
5. Close the scanner lid.  
1. Using the handle, completely open the front cover.  
Do not touch the green surface, the OPC drum or the front of the  
toner cartridge, with your hands or any other material. Use the  
handle on each cartridge in order to avoid touching this area.  
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt.  
If you leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes, the  
OPC drum can be exposed to light. This will cause damage to the  
OPC drum. Close the front cover should the installation need to  
be halted for any reason.  
58 | Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
2. Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the  
4. Slide the toner cartridge back into the printer.  
cartridge from the printer.  
5. Close the front cover. Ensure the cover is securely latched.  
When you open the front cover, be careful not to touch the  
underneath of the control panel (the lower part of the fuser unit). The  
temperature of the fuser unit might be high and could damage your  
skin.  
If the front cover is not completely closed, the printer will not  
operate.  
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE  
The printer uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each one:  
yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K).  
The status LED and the toner-related message on the display indicates  
which each individual toner cartridge should be replaced.  
Incoming faxes are saved in memory.  
At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. Check the type of  
toner cartridge for your printer (see "Supplies" on page 83).  
1. Turn the printer off, then wait a few minutes for the printer to cool.  
2. Using the handle, completely open the front cover.  
When you open the front cover and work inside the printer, it is highly  
recommend that you remove the paper transfer belt first. Because the  
work you do could contaminate the paper transfer belt.  
3. Holding both handles on the toner cartridge, thoroughly rock it from side  
to side to evenly distribute the toner.  
Do not touch the green surface, the OPC drum or the front of  
each toner cartridge, with your hands or any other material. Use  
the handle on each cartridge in order to avoid touching this area.  
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt.  
If you leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes, the  
OPC drum can be exposed to light. This will cause damage to the  
OPC drum. Close the front cover should the installation need to  
be halted for any reason.  
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry  
cloth and wash it in cold water. Hot water sets toner into  
fabric.  
Maintenance | 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the  
6. Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface, as shown, and remove the  
cartridge from the printer.  
paper covering the toner cartridge by removing the tape.  
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash  
it in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.  
7. Ensure that the color of the toner cartridge matches the color slot and  
then grasp the handles on the toner cartridge. Insert the cartridge until it  
clicks into place.  
When you open the front cover, be careful not to touch the underneath  
of the control panel (the lower part of the fuser unit). The temperature of  
the fuser unit might be high and could damage your skin.  
8. Close the front cover. Ensure the cover is securely latched, and then  
turn the printer on.  
If the front cover is not completely closed, the printer will not  
operate.  
When you open the front cover and work inside the printer, it is highly  
recommend that you remove the paper transfer belt first. Because the  
work you do could contaminate the paper transfer belt.  
Clearing the Toner Empty message  
4. Take a new toner cartridge out of its package.  
When the Toner Empty message appears you can configure not to see this  
message again not to disturb you.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press the Scroll buttons until Maintenance appears and press OK.  
3. Press the Scroll buttons until CLR Empty Msg. appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the color menu you want appears on  
display and press OK.  
Do not use sharp objects, such as a knife or scissors, to open  
the toner cartridge package. You could damage the surface of  
the toner cartridge.  
To prevent damage, do not expose the toner cartridge to light  
for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper to  
protect it if necessary.  
5. Select On and press OK.  
6. Now the Toner Empty message does not appear but the Replace  
Toner message will remain for reminding you that the new cartridge  
needs to be installed for quality.  
5. Holding both handles on the toner cartridge, thoroughly rock it from side  
Once you have selected On, this setting will be permanently  
written to the memory of the toner cartridge, and this menu will be  
disappeared from the Maintenance menu.  
to side to evenly distribute the toner.  
You can keep printing but the quality cannot be guaranteed, and  
the product support is no longer provided.  
60 | Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5. Holding the handle on the new paper transfer belt, align it with the slots  
REPLACING THE PAPER TRANSFER BELT  
on the inside of the front cover.  
The life of the paper transfer belt is approximately 50,000 black and color  
pages. After the life span of the paper transfer belt is complete, you have to  
replace it.  
The transfer belt-related message appears on the display, telling it is  
time for a replacement.  
The SmartPanel program window appears on the computer telling you  
the paper transfer belt needs to be replaced.  
The life span of the paper transfer belt may be affected by operating  
environment, printing interval, media type, and media size.  
1. Turn the printer off, then wait a few minutes for the printer to cool.  
2. Using the handle, completely open the front cover.  
6. Lower the paper transfer belt until it is parallel with the front cover and  
firmly seated.  
3. Press the green release handle to release the paper transfer belt.  
Holding the handle on the paper transfer belt, lift it out of the printer.  
7. Close the front cover firmly.  
8. Turn the printer on.  
4. Take a new paper transfer belt out of its package.  
Do not use sharp objects, such as a knife or scissors, to open  
the paper transfer belt package. You could damage the  
surface of the paper transfer belt.  
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt.  
Maintenance | 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Replacing the DADF rubber pad  
You will need to replace the DADF rubber pad when there seems to be a  
consistent problem with paper pickup or when its specified yield is reached.  
MAINTENANCE PARTS  
To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts,  
and to maintain your printer in top working condition the following condition,  
the following items will need to be replaced after the specified number of  
pages, or when the life span of each item has expired.  
1. Open the DADF cover.  
2. Remove the DADF rubber pad from the DADF, as shown.  
ITEMS  
YIELD (AVERAGE)  
Approx. 100,000 pages  
Approx. 20,000 pages  
Approx. 80,000 pages  
Approx. 70,000 pages  
Fuser unit  
DADF friction pad  
DADF pick-up roller  
Pick-up roller  
(Multi-purpose tray, FCFa, Optional  
tray 2)  
Friction pad  
Approx. 70,000 pages  
(Multi-purpose tray, FCF, Optional  
tray 2)  
1 DADF rubber  
pad  
a. First cassette feeder (Tray1)  
3. Insert a new DADF rubber pad into place.  
4. Close the DADF cover.  
It is highly recommend that this maintenance be performed by an authorized  
service provider, dealer or the retailer where you bought the printer. The  
warranty does not cover the replacement of the maintenance parts after  
their lifespan.  
MANAGING YOUR PRINTER FROM THE  
WEBSITE  
If you have connected your printer to a network and set up TCP/IP network  
parameters correctly, you can manage the printer via Dell’s Embedded  
Web Service, an Embedded Web Service. Use Embedded Web Service  
to:  
Checking replaceables  
If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems, check the  
number of pages the printer has printed or scanned. Replace the  
corresponding parts, if necessary.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Maintenance appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Supplies Life appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the item you want appears and press OK.  
View the printer’s device information and check its current status.  
Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters.  
Change the printer properties.  
Set the printer to send email notifications to let you know the printer’s  
status.  
Supplies Info: Prints the supply information page.  
Total: Displays the total number of pages printed.  
ADF Scan: Displays the number of pages scanned using the ADF.  
Platen Scan: Displays the number of pages scanned using the  
Get support for using the printer.  
To access Embedded Web Service:  
1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.  
2. Enter the printer IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field  
and press the Enter key or click Go.  
scanner glass.  
Transfer Belt, Fuser, Tray1 Roller, Tray2 Roller, MP Tray  
Roller: Displays the number of pages printed each item.  
5. If you selected to print a supply information page, press OK to confirm.  
Your printer’s embedded website opens.  
6. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
CHECKING THE PRINTER’S SERIAL NUMBER  
When you call for service or register as a user on the Dell website, the  
printer’s serial number may be required.  
You can check the serial number by taking the following steps:  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the  
display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Maintenance appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Serial Number appears and press OK.  
4. Check your printer’s serial number.  
5. Press Stop/Clear ( ) to return to Ready mode.  
62 | Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
troubleshooting  
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.  
This chapter includes:  
3. Pull the jammed paper gently out of the DADF.  
TIPS FOR AVOIDING PAPER JAMS  
By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided.  
When a paper jam occurs, follow the steps outlined on page (see "Tips for  
Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly.  
Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper  
capacity mark on the inside of the tray.  
Do not remove paper from the tray while your printer is printing.  
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.  
Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.  
Do not mix paper types in a tray.  
Use only recommended print media (see "Setting the paper size and  
Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing up in the  
tray, or facing down in the multi-purpose tray.  
4. Close the DADF cover. Then load the removed pages, if any, back into  
CLEARING DOCUMENT JAMS  
When an original jams while passing through the DADF, Document Jam  
the DADF.  
appears on the display.  
Input misfeed  
1. Remove any remaining pages from the DADF.  
2. Open the DADF cover.  
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin, or  
mixed paper-type originals.  
1 DADF cover  
Troubleshooting | 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Exit misfeed  
1. Remove any remaining pages from the DADF.  
2. Seize the misfeed paper, and remove the paper from the document  
CLEARING PAPER JAMS  
When a paper jam occurs, the warning message appears on the display  
screen. Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam.  
output tray by carefully pulling it to the right using both hands.  
LOCATION OF  
MESSAGE  
MP Tray  
GO TO  
JAM  
In the multi purpose See "In the multi-purpose  
tray  
Paper Jam 0  
Tray 2  
Paper jam 0  
In the optional tray  
Paper Jam 0  
Open/Close Door  
In the paper feed  
area or inside the  
printer  
Paper Jam 1  
Open/Close Door  
Inside the printer  
3. Load the removed pages back into the DADF.  
Paper Jam 2  
Check Inside  
Inside the printer or See "In the paper feed  
Roller misfeed  
1. Open the scanner lid.  
in the fuser area  
2. Seize the misfeed paper, and remove the paper from the feed area by  
Reverse Jam 0  
Check Inside  
In the fuser area or  
in the cover of  
reverse unit area  
carefully pulling it to the right using both hands.  
Reverse Jam 1  
Check Inside  
In the rear cover or  
in the cover of  
reverse unit area  
Remove Paper  
in Rear Cover  
Inside rear cover  
Inside the printer  
Duplex Jam 0  
Check Inside  
Duplex Jam 1  
Open/Close Door  
In the paper feed  
area or inside the  
printer  
Some messages may not appear in the display depending on options  
or models.  
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out gently and  
slowly. Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the  
jam.  
3. Close the scanner lid. Then load the removed pages back into the  
DADF.  
64 | Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Pull the tray open.  
In the paper feed area  
If paper is jammed in the paper feed area, follow the next steps to release  
the jammed paper.  
1. Using the handle, completely open the front cover.  
5. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out as shown  
below.  
2. Carefully remove the paper by pulling in the direction as shown below.  
Go to step 7.  
6. To replace the tray, lower the rear edge, align it with the slot, and slide it  
into the printer.  
If you cannot find the jammed paper, or if there is any resistance  
removing the paper, stop pulling, and go to step 3.  
Do not touch the green surface, the OPC drum or the front of  
each toner cartridge, with your hands or any other material. Use  
the handle on each cartridge in order to avoid touching this area.  
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt.  
If you leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes,  
the OPC drum can be exposed to light. This will cause  
damage to the OPC drum. Close the front cover should the  
installation need to be halted for any reason.  
7. Open the front cover and close it. The printer will resume printing.  
3. Close the front cover.  
Troubleshooting | 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7. Using the handle, completely open the front cover.  
In the multi-purpose tray  
When you print using the Multi-purpose Tray and the printer detects that  
there is either no paper or that the paper has been improperly loaded, follow  
the next steps to release the jammed paper.  
1. Check if the paper is stuck in the feeding area, and if so, pull it out gently  
and slowly.  
8. Remove the jammed paper by pulling in the direction shown. To avoid  
tearing the paper, pull it out gently and slowly.  
If you cannot find the jammed paper, or if there is any resistance  
removing the paper, stop pulling and go to step 2.  
2. Close the multi-purpose tray.  
3. Pull the tray out.  
4. Open the inner cover while you are pushing the lever with two hands.  
Do not touch the green surface, the OPC drum or the front of  
each toner cartridge, with your hands or any other material. Use  
the handle on each cartridge in order to avoid touching this area.  
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt.  
If you leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes, the  
OPC drum can be exposed to light. This will cause damage to the  
OPC drum. Close the front cover should the installation need to  
be halted for any reason.  
5. Pull the paper out gently.  
9. Close the front cover firmly. The printer will resume printing.  
If the front cover is not completely closed, the printer will not  
operate.  
6. Replace the tray.  
If you cannot find the jammed paper, or if there is any resistance  
removing the paper, stop pulling and go to step 8.  
66 | Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Pull up the paper jam lever to loose the fusing part of the fuser unit and  
In the fuser unit area  
If paper is jammed in the fuser unit area, follow the next steps to release the  
jammed paper.  
carefully take the jammed paper out of the printer.  
1. Open the scan unit.  
5. Press down the paper jam lever to fasten the fusing part.  
6. Close the inner cover.  
2. Open the inner cover using the handle.  
7. Lowering down the scan unit gently and slowly until it is completely  
closed. Ensure that it is securely latched.  
Be careful not to pinch your fingers!  
3. Open the inner cover using the handle on it and carefully take the  
jammed paper out of the printer.  
If the scan unit is not completely closed, the printer will not  
operate.  
Do not touch the fuser inside the inner cover. It is hot and could  
cause burns! The fuser's operating temperature is 180  
Take care when removing paper from the printer.  
°C (356°F).  
Troubleshooting | 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
shown to remove the misfed paper.  
In the paper exit area  
If paper is jammed in the paper exit area, follow the next steps to release  
the jammed paper.  
1. If a long portion of the paper is visible, pull it straight out. Open and close  
the front cover firmly. The printer will resume printing.  
4. Close the cover of reverse unit.  
5. Lowering down the scan unit gently and slowly until it is completely  
closed. Ensure that it is securely latched.  
If you cannot find the jammed paper, or if there is any resistance  
removing the paper, stop pulling and go to step 2.  
2. Open the scan unit.  
Be careful not to pinch your fingers!  
If the scan unit is not completely closed, the printer will not  
operate.  
3. Open the cover of reverse unit using the handle on it and carefully take  
If you cannot find the jammed paper, or if there is any resistance  
removing the paper, stop pulling and go to step 6.  
the jammed paper out of the printer.  
6. Open the rear cover and carefully take the jammed paper out of the  
printer.  
7. Close the rear cover.  
If there is any resistance removing the paper or difficulty picking up  
jammed paper, stop pulling and turn the release knob to the direction as  
68 | Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Pull the jammed paper out in the direction shown. To avoid tearing the  
In the optional tray  
If paper is jammed in the optional Tray, follow the next steps to release the  
jammed paper.  
paper, pull it out gently and slowly.  
1. Pull the optional Tray open. After you pull it all the way out, lift up the  
front part of the tray slightly to release the tray from the printer.  
6. Close the front cover firmly. The printer will resume printing.  
2. If you see the jammed paper, remove the paper from the printer by  
If the front cover is not completely closed, the printer will not  
operate.  
gently pulling it straight out as shown below.  
3. Slide the tray back into the printer.  
4. Open the front cover.  
Troubleshooting | 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING DISPLAY MESSAGES  
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
MESSAGE  
Cancel?  
MEANING  
Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the printer’s status  
or errors. Refer to the tables below to understand the messages’ meaning  
and correct the problem if necessary. Messages and their meanings are  
listed in alphabetical order.  
Your printer’s memory To cancel the fax job,  
has become full while press the OK button to  
W Yes X  
trying to store an  
original into memory.  
accept Yes.  
If the message is not in the table, cycle the power and try the  
printing job again. If the problem persists, call for service.  
Some messages may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models.  
If you want to send those  
pages that have been  
successfully stored,  
press the OK button to  
accept No. You should  
send the remaining  
pages later, when  
xxx indicates the media type.  
yyy indicates the tray.  
memory is available.  
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
Connection Error  
Connection Failed  
Connection with the  
SMTP server failed.  
Check the server  
settings and the network  
cable.  
MESSAGE  
MEANING  
[COMM. Error]  
[Incompatible]  
The printer has a  
communication  
problem.  
Ask the sender to try  
again.  
The protocol you have Check the protocol or  
entered is not  
supported or server  
port is wrong.  
server port.  
The printer has  
received a fax from  
which is registered as  
a junk fax.  
The received fax data  
will be deleted.  
DADF Cover  
Open Error  
The DADF cover is  
not securely latched.  
Close the DADF cover  
until it locks into place.  
[Line Error]  
Your printer cannot  
connect with the  
Try again. If the problem  
persists, wait an hour or  
Data Read Fail  
Check USB Mem.  
Time expired while  
reading data.  
Try again.  
receiving fax printer or so for the line to clear  
has lost contact  
because of a problem  
with the phone line.  
and try again.  
Data Write Fail  
Check USB Mem.  
Storing to the USB  
memory failed.  
Check the available USB  
memory space.  
Document Jam  
The loaded original  
has jammed in the  
DADF.  
Clear the jam (see  
[No Answer]  
The receiving fax  
printer has not  
answered after  
several redial  
attempts.  
Try again. Ensure that  
the receiving printer is  
operational.  
Door Open/Check  
Transfer Belt  
The front cover is not  
securely latched.  
Close the cover until it  
locks into place.  
Duplex Jam 0  
Check Inside  
Paper has jammed  
during duplex printing.  
This is applicable only  
to printers with this  
feature.  
Clear the jam  
[Stop Pressed]  
Try again.  
Stop/Clear ( ) has  
been pressed during  
an operation.  
[yyy]  
Paper Empty  
There is no paper in  
the tray.  
Load paper in the tray.  
Load the correct paper in  
specified in the printer the tray.  
properties does not  
match the paper you  
are loading.  
Duplex Jam 1  
Open/Close Door  
Paper has jammed  
during duplex printing.  
This is applicable only  
to printers with this  
feature.  
Clear the jam  
[yyy]  
Paper Mismatch  
The paper size  
Enter Again  
You entered an  
unavailable item.  
Enter the correct item  
again.  
[yyy]  
Cassette Out  
The tray cassette is  
not properly closed.  
To close the tray, lower  
the rear edge, align it  
with the slot, and slide it  
into the printer.  
File Access  
Denied  
Login to the network  
server was  
successful. However,  
access to the file on  
the network server  
was denied.  
Change the server  
settings.  
Adjusting...  
Registration  
The printer is  
adjusting the color  
registration.  
Wait a few minutes.  
File Format  
Not Supported  
The selected file  
format is not  
supported.  
Use the correct file  
format.  
Authentication  
Failure  
The ID or password  
you entered is  
incorrect.  
Enter the correct ID or  
password.  
70 | Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
MESSAGE  
MEANING  
MESSAGE  
Install  
MEANING  
File Name Exist  
The file name you  
have entered already  
exists.  
Enter a different file  
name.  
The corresponding  
part of the printer is  
not installed.  
Install the part into your  
printer.  
[xxx]  
File Name  
Over Limit  
The file names you  
can use are from  
doc001 to doc999.  
However, all file  
names are used  
already.  
Delete unnecessary  
files.  
Invalid  
[xxx]  
The color part of the  
printer is not for your  
printer.  
Install the a Dell-genuine  
part designed for your  
printer.  
Install Toner  
The color toner  
cartridge is not  
installed.  
Install the color toner  
cartridge.  
T
Fuser Fan  
Locked  
There is a problem in  
the cooling fan of the  
printer.  
Open and then close the  
front cover.  
Invalid Toner  
The color toner  
cartridge you have  
Install the a Dell-genuine  
color toner cartridge  
T
installed is not for your designed for your  
Global Address  
Not Found  
When the device is  
unable to locate the  
given address of the  
Global server.  
Check the search ID.  
printer.  
printer.  
Invalid Server  
Address  
The server address  
you have entered is  
invalid.  
Enter the correct server  
address.  
Global Query  
Size Exceeded  
This is an error  
There are too many  
message and displays search results. Refine  
when the global query your search by entering  
IP Conflict  
Line Busy  
Low Power  
The network IP  
Check the IP address  
and reset it if necessary.  
address you have set  
is being used by  
someone else.  
size has been  
exceeded.  
more letters.  
Contact a LDAP server  
administrator.  
The receiving fax  
Try again after a few  
Global Server  
Auth Failed  
When there is a  
Check the authentication  
account and password.  
printer did not answer minutes.  
or the line is already  
engaged.  
authentication fail  
while connecting to  
the global server this  
message displays.  
The printer is in the  
previous stage of the  
power save mode.  
When data is received, it  
switches to on-line  
automatically.  
Global Server  
Not Configured  
When no global server Check the LDAP server  
is configured, this  
message displays.  
configuration settings.  
Mail Exceeds  
Server Support  
The mail size is larger Divide your mail or  
than the supported  
reduce the resolution.  
Global Server  
Not Found  
When the device is  
unable to find the  
Global server.  
Check the LDAP server  
address, The LDAP  
server address is  
incorrect, or the server  
has failed.  
size by SMTP server.  
Main Motor  
Locked  
There is a problem in  
the main motor.  
Open and then close the  
front cover.  
The multi-purpose  
tray is empty in  
manual feed mode.  
Load paper in the multi-  
purpose tray. See  
Load Manually  
Press Start Key  
Global Server  
Query Timeout  
Network Information  
Center (NIC) failed to  
get the proper  
response from the  
LDAP server within  
specified time.  
Check the LDAP server  
setting, LDAP server  
setting is incorrect.  
Memory Full  
The memory is full.  
Delete unnecessary fax  
jobs and retransmit after  
more memory becomes  
available. Alternatively,  
split the transmission  
into more than one  
operation.  
Global Server  
Comm Error  
This error message  
displays when there is  
a communication error  
between the global  
Try again.  
Contact a LDAP Server  
administrator.  
server and the device.  
Group Not  
Available  
You have tried to  
Use a speed dial number  
MP Tray  
Paper Jam 0  
Paper has jammed in  
Clear the jam. See "In  
select a group location or dial a number  
the feeding area of the the paper feed area" on  
number where only a  
single location  
manually using the  
number keypad.  
multi-purpose tray.  
number can be used,  
such as when adding  
locations for a Multiple  
Send operation.  
Network Error  
There is a problem  
with the network.  
Contact your network  
administrator.  
Troubleshooting | 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
MESSAGE  
MEANING  
MESSAGE  
MEANING  
Not Assigned  
The speed button or  
speed dial number  
you tried to use has  
no number assigned  
to it.  
Enter the number  
Refilled Toner  
The toner cartridge  
you have installed is  
not genuine or refilled. cartridge is installed,  
since its characteristics  
may significantly differ  
from the genuine.  
The print quality may get  
poor if the refilled toner  
manually using the  
T
number keypad or store  
the number or address.  
We recommend Dell-  
genuine color toner  
cartridge.  
Not Available  
Try Again Later  
Can not perform the  
task immediately  
because too many  
tasks are running at  
once.  
Try again when current  
task is completed.  
Replace Toner  
This message  
Replace the toner  
appears between  
Toner Empty and  
Toner Low status.  
cartridge with a new one.  
T
NonDELL Toner  
The color toner  
cartridge which the  
arrow indicates is not  
a Dell-genuine  
cartridge.  
Press OK to toggle  
the message to Stop  
or Continue.  
You can select either  
Stop or Continue with  
the left/right arrow.  
If you select Stop by  
pressing OK on the  
control panel, the printer  
stops printing. If you  
select Continue, the  
printer keeps printing,  
but the quality cannot be  
guaranteed.  
T
Replace  
[xxx]  
The life of the part  
expires totally.  
Replace the part with a  
new one. Call for  
service.  
Replace  
The life of the part  
expires soon.  
W Stop X  
[xxx] Soon  
If you do not select any,  
the printer will work as  
Stop is selected.  
Retry Redial?  
The printer is waiting  
for a specified time  
interval to redial a  
previously busy  
station.  
You can press OK to  
immediately redial, or  
Replace the  
Stop/Clear ( ) to  
cancel the redial  
operation.  
corresponding toner  
cartridge with a Dell-  
genuine cartridge (see  
Reverse Jam 0  
Check Inside  
Paper has jammed in  
the paper fuser area  
and In the cover of  
reverse unit area.  
Clear the jam (see "In  
One Page is  
Too Large  
Single page data  
exceeds the  
configured mail size.  
Reduce the resolution  
and try again.  
Reverse Jam 1  
Check Inside  
Paper has jammed In  
the cover of reverse  
Clear the jam (see "In  
Operation  
Not Assigned  
You are in the Add  
Page/Cancel Job  
operation, but there  
are no jobs stored.  
Check the display to see  
if there are any  
unit area or in the rear page 67).  
cover.  
scheduled jobs.  
Scanner locked  
The scanner module  
is locked  
Unlock the scanner and  
press Stop/Clear ( ).  
Out-Bin Full  
The output tray of the  
printer is full of paper.  
Remove paper.  
Self Diagnostics  
Temperature  
The engine in your  
printer is checking  
problems detected.  
Wait a few minutes.  
Paper Jam 0  
Open/Close Door  
Paper has jammed in  
Clear the jam (see "In  
the feeding area of the the paper feed area" on  
tray.  
Self Diagnostics  
LSU  
The LSU (Laser  
Wait a few minutes.  
Scanning Unit) in your  
printer is checking  
problems detected.  
Paper has jammed  
inside the printer.  
Paper Jam 1  
Open/Close Door  
Clear the jam (see "In  
Send Error  
(AUTH)  
There is a problem in  
Configure the  
Special print media  
has jammed in the  
paper exit area.  
Paper Jam 2  
Check Inside  
Clear the jam (see "In  
SMTP authentication. authentication setting.  
Send Error  
(DNS)  
There is a problem in  
DNS.  
Configure the DNS  
setting.  
Power Failure  
Power has turned off  
then on and the  
printer’s memory has  
not been back up.  
The job which you were  
trying to do before the  
power failure must be  
completely re-done.  
Send Error  
(POP3)  
There is a problem in  
POP3.  
Configure the POP3  
setting.  
Send Error  
(SMTP)  
There is a problem in  
SMTP.  
Change to the available  
server.  
Remove Paper  
in Rear Cover  
Paper has jammed in  
the paper rear cover  
area.  
Clear the jam (see "In  
72 | Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SOLVING OTHER PROBLEMS  
The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the  
recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is  
corrected. If the problem persists, call for service.  
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
MESSAGE  
Send Error  
MEANING  
There is a problem on Configure your network  
the network interface  
card.  
interface card correctly.  
(Wrong Config)  
Paper feeding  
Toner Empty  
The color toner  
cartridge has run out.  
The printer stops  
printing.  
You can select the  
option among Stop,  
Continue or Black Only  
with the left/right arrow.  
If you select Stop by  
T
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Paper is jammed  
during printing.  
Press OK to toggle  
the message to Stop, pressing OK on the  
control panel, the printer  
stops printing. If you  
select Continue, the  
printer keeps printing,  
but the quality cannot be  
guaranteed.  
If you select Black Only,  
the printer prints the data  
in black. In this case, the  
mono printing feature is  
preset in the printer  
properties.  
Continue or Black  
Paper sticks  
together.  
Ensure there is not too much paper in the tray.  
The tray can hold up to 250 sheets of paper,  
depending on the thickness of your paper.  
Ensure that you are using the correct type of  
Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the  
paper.  
Humid conditions may cause some paper to  
Only.  
W Stop X  
If the black  
toner cartridge  
is empty,  
Black Only  
messagedoes  
not appear.  
stick together.  
When you copy, the  
Black Start button will  
be activated only with  
this condition.  
If you do not select any,  
the printer will work as  
Stop is selected.  
Multiple sheets of  
paper do not feed.  
Different types of paper may be stacked in the  
tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and  
weight.  
If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam,  
Replace the color toner  
cartridge with a new one  
Paper does not feed  
into the printer.  
Remove any obstructions from inside the  
printer.  
Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove  
paper from the tray and reload it correctly.  
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove  
excess paper from the tray.  
The paper is too thick. Use only paper that  
meets the specifications required by the printer  
DADF rubber pad may require to be replaced  
Toner Exhausted  
The lifespan of the  
color toner cartridge  
which the arrow  
This message appears  
when the toner is  
completely empty, and  
your printer stops  
printing. Replace the  
corresponding toner  
cartridge with a Dell-  
genuine cartridge (see  
T
indicates is reached.  
The paper keeps  
jamming.  
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove  
excess paper from the tray. If you are printing  
Toner Low  
The corresponding  
Take out the toner  
color toner cartridge is cartridge and thoroughly  
on special materials, use the multi-purpose tray  
An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use  
only paper that meets the specifications  
required by the printer (see "Selecting print  
There may be debris inside the printer. Open  
the front cover and remove the debris.  
If an original does not feed into the printer, the  
DADF rubber pad may require to be replaced  
.
T
almost empty.  
shake it. By doing this,  
you can temporarily  
reestablish printing  
operations.  
If you do not  
want this  
message to  
appear, see  
Tray 2  
Paper jam 0  
Paper has jammed In  
the paper feed area.  
Clear the jam (see "In  
Envelopes skew or  
fail to feed correctly.  
Ensure the paper guides are against both sides of  
the envelopes.  
Updating Data  
Please Wait...  
This message  
Do not turn the power off  
appears when there is when this message is  
a change in the  
system setting or  
when you back up a  
data.  
showing. Changes may  
not be saved and datas  
can be lost.  
Troubleshooting | 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Printing problems  
POSSIBLE  
CAUSE  
CONDITION  
The printer  
selects print  
materials from  
the wrong paper  
source.  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
POSSIBLE  
CAUSE  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
The paper source  
selection in the  
printer properties  
may be incorrect.  
For many software  
applications, the paper  
source selection is found  
under the Thin Paper tab  
within the printer properties.  
Select the correct paper  
source. See the printer driver  
help screen.  
The printer does The printer is not  
Check the power cord  
connections. Check the  
power switch and the power  
source.  
receiving power.  
not print.  
The printer is not  
selected as the  
default printer.  
Select Dell 2145cn Color  
Laser MFP as your default  
printer in your Windows.  
A print job is  
extremely slow.  
The job may be very Reduce the complexity of the  
complex.  
page or try adjusting the print  
quality settings.  
Check the printer for the following:  
The front cover is not closed. Close the cover.  
Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam  
The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the  
toner cartridge.  
Half the page is  
blank.  
The page orientation Change the page orientation  
setting may be  
incorrect.  
in your application. See the  
printer driver help screen.  
The paper size and  
the paper size  
settings do not  
match.  
Ensure that the paper size in  
the printer driver settings  
matches the paper in the  
tray.  
Or, ensure that the paper  
size in the printer driver  
settings matches the paper  
selection in the software  
application settings you use.  
If a system error occurs, contact your service  
representative.  
The connection  
cable between the  
computer and the  
printer is not  
Disconnect the printer cable  
and reconnect it.  
connected properly.  
The printer  
The printer cable is  
loose or defective.  
Disconnect the printer cable  
and reconnect. Try a print job  
that you have already printed  
successfully. If possible,  
attach the cable and the  
printer to another computer  
and try a print job that you  
know works. Finally, try a  
new printer cable.  
prints, but the  
text is wrong,  
garbled, or  
The connection  
If possible, attach the cable  
to another computer that is  
working properly and print a  
job. You can also try using a  
different printer cable.  
cable between the  
computer and the  
printer is defective.  
incomplete.  
The port setting is  
incorrect.  
Check the Windows printer  
setting to ensure that the  
print job is sent to the correct  
port. If the computer has  
more than one port, ensure  
that the printer is attached to  
the correct one.  
The wrong printer  
Check the application’s  
driver was selected. printer selection menu to  
ensure that your printer is  
selected.  
The software  
application is  
malfunctioning.  
Try printing a job from  
another application.  
The printer may be  
configured  
incorrectly.  
Check the printer properties  
to ensure that all of the print  
settings are correct.  
The operating  
system is  
malfunctioning.  
Exit Windows and reboot the  
computer. Turn the printer off  
and then back on again.  
The printer driver  
may be incorrectly  
installed.  
Reinstall the printer software.  
See the Software section.  
Pages print, but  
are blank.  
The toner cartridge  
Redistribute the toner, if  
The printer is  
Check the display message  
on the control panel to see if  
the printer is indicating a  
system error.  
is defective or out of necessary (see  
malfunctioning.  
toner.  
If necessary, replace the  
toner cartridge.  
The document size  
is so big that the  
hard disk space of  
the computer is not  
enough to access  
the print job.  
Get more hard disk space  
and print the document  
again.  
The file may have  
blank pages.  
Check the file to ensure that  
it does not contain blank  
pages.  
Some parts, such as Contact a service  
the controller or the  
board, may be  
defective.  
representative.  
74 | Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
POSSIBLE  
CAUSE  
CONDITION  
Toner specks  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
The paper may not meet specifications; for  
example, the paper is too moist or too  
The paper path may need cleaning. See  
The printer does Incompatibility  
Printing the PDF file as an  
image may solve this  
problem. Turn on Print As  
Image from the Acrobat  
printing options.  
between the PDF  
file and the Acrobat  
products.  
not print PDF file  
correctly. Some  
parts of  
graphics, text, or  
illustrations are  
missing.  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
It will take longer to  
print when you print a  
PDF file as an image.  
The print quality The resolution of the Reduce the photo size. If you  
Dropouts  
If faded areas, generally rounded, occur  
randomly on the page:  
photo is very low.  
increase the photo size in the  
software application, the  
resolution will be reduced.  
of photos is not  
good. Images  
are not clear.  
A single sheet of paper may be defective.  
Try reprinting the job.  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
The printer  
If you are under the  
DOS environment,  
the font setting for  
your printer may be  
set incorrectly.  
Suggested solutions: Change  
the font setting (see  
The moisture content of the paper is  
uneven or the paper has moist spots on its  
surface. Try a different brand of paper. See  
processes can cause some areas to reject  
toner. Try a different kind or brand of  
paper.  
Change the printer option and try again. Go  
to printer properties, click Paper tab, and  
set type to Thick Paper. Refer to the  
Software section for details.  
prints, but the  
text is wrong,  
garbled, or  
incomplete.  
Before printing,  
the printer emits  
vapor near the  
output tray.  
Using damp paper  
can cause vapor  
during printing.  
This is not a problem. Just  
keep printing.  
The printer does Paper size and  
Set the correct paper size in  
paper size setting do the Custom in the Paper tab  
not print special  
sized paper  
such as a billing  
paper.  
not match.  
in the printer propeties. See  
Software section  
If these steps do not correct the problem,  
contact a service representative.  
.
White spots appear on the page:  
White Spots  
The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from  
the paper falls to the inner devices within  
the printer, which means the transfer belt  
may be dirty. Clean the inside of your  
printer. Contact a service representative.  
The paper path may need cleaning.  
Contact a service representative.  
Printing quality problems  
If the inside of the printer is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, you  
may notice a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the  
problem.  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Light or faded print If a vertical white streak or faded area appears  
on the page:  
Vertical lines  
If black vertical streaks appear on the page:  
The toner supply is low. You may be able  
to temporarily extend the toner cartridge  
quality, install a new toner cartridge.  
The paper may not meet paper  
specifications; for example, the paper is too  
resolution setting is too low. Adjust the print  
resolution. See the help screen of the  
printer driver.  
The drum inside the toner cartridge has  
probably been scratched. Remove the  
toner cartridge and install a new one. See  
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:  
The surface of the LSU part inside the  
printer may be dirty. See "Cleaning the  
If vertical streaks appear on the page:  
The surface of the scanner glass and its  
white sheet may be dirty. Clean these unit.  
representative.  
A combination of faded or smeared defects  
may indicate that the toner cartridge needs  
cleaning.  
The surface of the LSU part inside the  
printer may be dirty. See "Cleaning the  
Troubleshooting | 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
Misformed  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Color or Black  
background  
If the amount of background shading becomes  
unacceptable:  
If characters are improperly formed and  
producing hollow images, the paper stock  
may be too slick. Try a different paper. See  
producing a wavy effect, the scanner unit  
may need service. For service, contact a  
service representative.  
characters  
Change to a lighter weight paper. See  
(low humidity) or high humidity (higher than  
80% RH) conditions can increase the  
amount of background shading.  
Remove the old toner cartridge and install  
Toner smear  
Clean the inside of the printer. See  
Page skew  
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
Check the paper type and quality. See  
loaded correctly and the guides are not too  
tight or too loose against the paper stack.  
Vertical repetitive  
defects  
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side  
of the page at even intervals:  
Curl or wave  
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
Check the paper type and quality. Both high  
temperature and humidity can cause paper  
Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also  
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
The toner cartridge may be damaged. If a  
repetitive mark occurs on the page, print a  
cleaning sheet several times to clean the  
cartridge. After the printout, if you still have  
the same problems, remove the toner  
cartridge and install a new one. See  
them. If the defects occur on the back of  
the page, the problem will likely correct  
itself after a few more pages.  
Wrinkles or creases  
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
Check the paper type and quality. See  
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
The fusing assembly may be damaged.  
Contact a service representative.  
Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner  
randomly distributed on the printed page.  
The paper may be too damp. Try printing  
with a different batch of paper. Do not open  
packages of paper until necessary so that  
the paper does not absorb too much  
moisture.  
If background scatter occurs on an  
envelope, change the printing layout to  
avoid printing over areas that have  
overlapping seams on the reverse side.  
Printing on seams can cause problems.  
If background scatter covers the entire  
surface area of a printed page, adjust the  
print resolution through your software  
application or the printer properties.  
Back of printouts  
are dirty  
Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of  
A
76 | Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Solid Color or  
Black pages  
The toner cartridge may not be installed  
properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert  
it.  
The toner cartridge may be defective and  
need replacing. Remove the toner cartridge  
and install a new one. See "Replacing the  
An unknown image Your printer is probably being used at an  
altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or above.  
repetitivelyappears  
on a next few  
sheets or loose  
toner, light print, or  
contamination  
occurs.  
The high altitude may affect the print quality  
such as loose toner or light imaging. You can  
set this option through Start  
Programs  
your printer driver  
Printer Settings Utility. See "Altitude  
DELL  
name  
DELL Printers  
service representative.  
Copying problems  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Loose toner  
Clean the inside of the printer. See  
require repair. Contact a service  
representative.  
Copies are too light  
or too dark.  
Use Darkness ( ) to darken or lighten the  
background of the copies.  
Smears, lines,  
If defects are on the original, press  
marks, or spots  
appears on copies.  
Darkness ( ) to lighten the background of  
your copies.  
If no defects are on the original, clean the  
Character Voids  
Character voids are white areas within parts of  
characters that should be solid black:  
Copy image is  
skewed.  
Ensure that the original is face down on the  
scanner glass or face up in the DADF.  
Check that the copy paper is loaded  
correctly.  
If you are using transparencies, try another  
type of transparency. Because of the  
composition of transparencies, some  
character voids are normal.  
Blank copies print  
out.  
Ensure that the original is face down on the  
scanner glass or face up in the DADF.  
You may be printing on the wrong surface  
of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it  
around.  
The paper may not meet paper  
A
Image rubs off the  
copy easily.  
Replace the paper in the tray with paper  
from a new package.  
In high humidity areas, do not leave paper  
in the printer for extended periods of time.  
Horizontal stripes  
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears  
appear:  
Frequent copy paper  
jams occur.  
Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in  
the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with  
a fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper  
guides, if necessary.  
Ensure that the paper is the proper paper  
weight. 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) paper is  
recommended.  
Check for copy paper or pieces of copy  
paper remaining in the printer after a paper  
jam has been cleared.  
The toner cartridge may be installed  
improperly. Remove the cartridge and  
reinsert it.  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
The toner cartridge may be defective.  
Remove the toner cartridge and install a  
require repair. Contact a service  
representative.  
Toner cartridge  
produces fewer  
copies than expected  
before running out of  
toner.  
Your originals may contain pictures, solids,  
or heavy lines. For example, your originals  
may be forms, newsletters, books, or other  
documents that use more toner.  
The printer may be turned on and off  
frequently.  
Curl  
If the printed paper is curled or paper does not  
feed into the printer:  
Turn over the stack of paper in the tray.  
Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
Change the printer option and try again. Go  
to printer properties, click Paper tab, and  
set type to Thin Paper. Refer to the  
Software section for details.  
The scanner lid may be left open while  
copies are being made.  
Troubleshooting | 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Scanning problems  
Dell Scan Manager problems  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
The scanner does  
not work.  
Ensure that you place the original to be  
scanned face down on the scanner glass, or  
face up in the DADF.  
There may not be enough available memory  
to hold the document you want to scan. Try  
the Prescan function to see if that works. Try  
lowering the scan resolution rate.  
I cannot use the Dell  
Scan Manager.  
Check your operating system. Supporting  
operating systems are Windows 2000/XP/  
2003/2008/Vista.  
Fax problems  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Check that the USB cable is connected  
properly.  
The printer is not  
working, there is no  
display and the  
buttons are not  
working.  
Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.  
Ensure that there is power to the electrical  
outlet.  
Ensure that the USB cable is not defective.  
Switch the cable with a known good cable. If  
necessary, replace the cable.  
Check that the scanner is configured  
correctly. Check scan setting in the  
SmarThru Configuration or the application  
you want to use to make certain that the  
scanner job is being sent to the correct port.  
No dial tone sounds.  
Check that the phone line is connected  
properly.  
Check that the phone socket in the wall is  
working by plugging in another phone.  
The unit scans very  
slowly.  
Check if the printer is printing received data.  
If so, scan the document after the received  
data has been printed.  
The numbers stored  
in memory do not  
dial correctly.  
Ensure that the numbers are stored in memory  
correctly. Print a Phone Book list, referring to  
Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.  
Communication speed slows in scan mode  
because of the large amount of memory  
required to analyze and reproduce the  
scanned image. Set your computer to the  
ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It  
will help to increase the speed. For details  
about how to set BIOS, refer to your  
computer user’s guide.  
The original does not  
feed into the printer.  
Ensure that the paper is not wrinkled and  
you are putting it in correctly. Check that the  
original is the right size, not too thick or thin  
Ensure that the DADF is firmly closed.  
The ADF rubber pad may need to be  
Message appears on  
your computer  
screen:  
There may be a copying or printing job in  
progress. When that job is complete, try your  
job again.  
Faxes are not  
received  
automatically.  
The receiving mode should be set to Fax.  
Ensure that there is paper in the tray.  
Check to see if the display shows any error  
message. If it does, clear the problem.  
“Device cannot be  
set to the H/W  
mode you want.”  
“Port is being used  
by another  
The Selected port is currently being used.  
Restart your computer and try again.  
The printer cable may be improperly  
connected or the power may be off.  
The scanner driver is not installed or the  
operating environment is not set up properly.  
Ensure that the printer is properly connected  
and the power is on, Then restart your  
computer.  
The printer does not  
send.  
Ensure that the original is loaded in the  
DADF or on the scanner glass.  
Sending should show up on the display.  
Check the fax printer you are sending to, to  
see if it can receive your fax.  
program.”  
“Port is Disabled.  
“Scanner is busy  
receiving or  
The incoming fax has  
blank spaces or is of  
poor-quality.  
The fax printer sending you the fax may be  
faulty.  
A noisy phone line can cause line errors.  
Check your printer by making a copy.  
The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace  
the toner cartridge, referring to page 59.  
printing data.  
When the current  
job is completed,  
try again.”  
“Invalid handle.”  
“Scanning has  
failed.”  
The USB cable may be improperly  
connected or the power may be off.  
Some of the words  
on an incoming fax  
are stretched.  
The fax printer sending you the fax had a  
temporary document jam.  
There are lines on  
the originals you  
send.  
Check your scan unit for marks and clean it.  
78 | Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
POSSIBLE  
CAUSE  
PROBLEM  
SOLUTION  
The printer dials a  
number, but a  
connection with the  
other fax printer fails.  
The other fax printer may be turned off, out of  
paper, or cannot answer incoming calls. Speak  
with the other printer operator and ask her/him  
to sort out the problem.  
When printing a  
document in  
Macintosh with  
Acrobat  
Reader 6.0 or  
higher, colors  
print incorrectly.  
The resolution  
setting in the  
printer driver may  
not be matched  
with the one in  
Acrobat Reader.  
Ensure that the resolution  
setting in your printer driver  
matches the one in Acrobat  
Reader.  
Faxes do not store in There may not be enough memory space to  
memory.  
store the fax. If the display shows the Memory  
Full message, delete from memory any faxes  
you no longer need and then try again to store  
the fax.  
Common Windows problems  
Blank areas appear  
at the bottom of each  
page or on other  
pages, with a small  
strip of text at the  
top.  
You may have chosen the wrong paper  
settings in the user option setting. For details  
about paper settings. See "Selecting print  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
“File in Use”  
message appears  
during installation.  
Exit all software applications. Remove all  
software from the StartUp Group, then restart  
Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.  
“General Protection  
Fault”, “Exception  
OE”, “Spool32”, or  
“Illegal Operation”  
messages appear.  
Close all other applications, reboot Windows  
and try printing again.  
Common PostScript problems  
The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when  
several printer languages are being used.  
To receive a printed or screen-displayed message when PostScript  
errors occur, open the Print Options window and click the desired  
selection next to the PostScript errors section  
“Fail To Print”, “A  
printer timeout error  
occurred.messages  
appear.  
These messages may appear during printing.  
Just keep waiting until the printer finishes  
printing. If the message appears in ready mode  
or after printing has been completed, check the  
connection and/or whether an error has  
occurred.  
POSSIBLE  
CAUSE  
PROBLEM  
SOLUTION  
PostScript file  
cannot be  
printed.  
The PostScript  
driver may not be  
installed correctly.  
Install the PostScript  
driver, referring to  
Software section.  
Print a configuration page  
and verify that the PS  
version is available for  
printing.  
Refer to the Microsoft Windows documentation that came with your  
computer for further information on Windows error messages.  
If the problem persists,  
contact a service  
representative.  
“Limit Check  
Error” message  
appears.  
The print job was  
too complex.  
You might need to reduce the  
complexity of the page or  
install more memory.  
A PostScript  
error page prints.  
The print job may  
not be PostScript.  
Ensure that the print job is a  
PostScript job. Check to see  
whether the software  
application expected a setup  
or PostScript header file to be  
sent to the printer.  
The optional tray The printer driver  
Open the PostScript driver  
properties, select the Device  
Settings tab, and set the Tray  
option of the Installable  
has not been  
configured to  
recognize the  
optional tray.  
is not selected in  
the driver.  
Options section to Installed  
.
Troubleshooting | 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Common Linux problems  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Some color images  
come out in  
unexpected color.  
This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU  
Ghostscript version 7.xx) when the base color  
space of the document is indexed RGB color  
space and it is converted through CIE color  
space. Because Postscript uses CIE color  
space for Color Matching System, you should  
upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least  
GNU Ghostscript version 8.xx or later. You can  
find recent Ghostscript versions at  
The printer does not  
print.  
Check if the printer driver is installed in your  
system. Open Unified Driver configurator  
and switch to the Printers tab in Printers  
configuration window to look at the list of  
available printers. Ensure that your printer is  
displayed on the list. If not, invoke Add new  
printer wizard to set up your device.  
Check if the printer is started. Open Printers  
configuration and select your printer on the  
printers list. Look at the description in the  
Selected printer pane. If its status contains  
“(stopped)” string, press the Start button.  
After that normal operation of the printer  
should be restored. The “stopped” status  
might be activated when some problems in  
printing occurred. For instance, this could be  
an attempt to print document when port is  
claimed by a scanning application.  
www.ghostscript.com.  
The printer does not  
print whole pages  
and its output is half  
page printed.  
It is a known problem that occurs when a color  
printer is used on version 8.51 or earlier of  
Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and reported to  
bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug  
688252.  
The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v.  
8.52 or above. Download the latest version of  
AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/  
projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this  
problem.  
Check if the port is not busy. Since functional  
components of MFP (printer and scanner)  
share the same I/O interface (port), the  
situation of simultaneous access of different  
“consumer” application to the same port is  
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only  
one of them at a time is allowed to gain  
control over the device. The other  
I cannot scan via  
Gimp Front-end.  
Check if Gimp Front-end has “Xsane: Device  
dialog.” on the “Acquire” menu. If not, you  
should install Xsane plug-in for Gimp on the  
your computer. You can find Xsane plug-in  
package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or  
Gimp home page. For the detail information,  
refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or  
Gimp Front-end application.  
“consumer” will encounter “device busy”  
response. You should open ports  
If you wish to use other kind of scan application,  
refer to the Help for application.  
configuration and select the port assigned to  
your printer. In the Selected port pane you  
can see if the port is occupied by some other  
application. If this is the case, you should  
wait for completion of the current job or  
should press Release port button, if you are  
sure that the present owner is not functioning  
properly.  
Check if your application has special print  
option such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified  
in the command line parameter then remove  
it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select  
“print” -> “Setup printer” and edit command  
line parameter in the command item.  
I encounter error  
“Cannot open port  
device file” when  
printing a document.  
Avoid changing print job parameters (via LPR  
GUI, for example) while a print job is in  
progress. Known versions of CUPS server  
break the print job whenever print options are  
changed and then try to restart the job from the  
beginning. Since Unified Linux Driver locks port  
while printing, the abrupt termination of the  
driver keeps the port locked and therefore  
unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If this  
situation occurred, try to release the port.  
The CUPS (Common Unix Printing System)  
version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2  
(cups-1.1.21) has a problem with ipp  
(Internet Printing Protocol) printing.Use the  
socket printing instead of ipp or install later  
version of CUPS (cups-1.1.22 or higher).  
Some color images  
come out all black.  
This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU  
Ghostscript version 7.05) when the base color  
space of the document is indexed color space  
and it is converted through CIE color space.  
Because Postscript uses CIE color space for  
Color Matching System, you should upgrade  
Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU  
Ghostscript version 7.06 or later. You can find  
recent Ghostscript versions at  
www.ghostscript.com.  
80 | Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
The printer does not  
appear on the  
scanners list.  
Check if your printer is attached to your  
computer. Ensure that it is connected properly  
via the USB port and is turned on.  
Check if the scanner driver for your printer is  
installed in your system. Open Unified Driver  
configurator, switch to Scanners  
configuration, then press Drivers. Ensure  
that driver with a name corresponding to  
your printer's name is listed in the window.  
Check if the port is not busy. Since functional  
components of MFP (printer and scanner)  
share the same I/O interface (port), the  
situation of simultaneous access of different  
“consumer” application to the same port is  
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only  
one of them at a time is allowed to gain  
control over the device. The other  
The printer does not  
scan.  
Check if a document is loaded into the printer.  
Check if your printer is connected to the  
computer. Ensure if it is connected properly if I/  
O error is reported while scanning.  
Check if the port is not busy. Since functional  
components of MFP (printer and scanner)  
share the same I/O interface (port), the  
situation of simultaneous access of different  
“consumer” application to the same port is  
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one  
of them at a time is allowed to gain control over  
the device. The other “consumer” will  
encounter “device busy” response. This can  
usually happen while starting scan procedure,  
and appropriate message box will be displayed.  
To identify the source of the problem, you  
should open ports configuration and select the  
port assigned to your scanner. port’s symbol /  
dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation  
displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1  
relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /  
dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/  
mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially. In  
the Selected port pane you can see if the port is  
occupied by some other application. If this is  
the case, you should wait for completion of the  
current job or should press Release port  
button, if you are sure that the present port’s  
owner is not functioning properly.  
“consumer” will encounter “device busy”  
response. This can usually happen while  
starting scan procedure, and appropriate  
message box appears.  
To identify the source of the problem, you  
should open ports configuration and select the  
port assigned to your scanner. port's symbol /  
dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation  
displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1  
relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /  
dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/  
mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially. In  
the Selected port pane you can see if the port is  
occupied by some other application. If this is  
the case, you should wait for completion of  
the current job or should press Release port  
button, if you are sure that the present port's  
owner is not functioning properly.  
Refer to Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further  
information on Linux error messages.  
Troubleshooting | 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Common Macintosh problems  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
The printer does not  
print PDF file correctly.  
Some parts of graphics,  
text, or illustrations are  
missing.  
Incompatibility between the PDF file and  
the Acrobat products:  
Printing the PDF file as an image may  
solve this problem. Turn on Print As  
Image from the Acrobat printing options.  
It will take longer to print when  
you print a PDF file as an image.  
The document has  
printed, but the print job  
has not disappeared  
from the spooler in Mac  
OS 10.3.2.  
Update your Mac OS to OS 10.3.3. or  
higher.  
Some letters are not  
displayed normally  
during the Cover page  
printing.  
This problem is caused because Mac OS  
cannot create the font during the Cover  
page printing. English alphabet and  
numbers are displayed normally at the  
Cover page.  
Refer to Mac OS User’s Guide that came with your computer for  
further information on Mac OS error messages.  
82 | Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ordering supplies and accessories  
This chapter provides information on purchasing cartridges and accessories available for your printer.  
This chapter includes:  
ACCESSORIES  
You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your printer’s  
performance and capacity.  
The optional parts or features may differ by countries. Contact your  
sales representatives whether the part you want is available in your  
country.  
ACCESSORY  
DESCRIPTION  
PART NUMBER  
KR039: 256 MB  
SUPPLIES  
Memory module  
Extends your  
printer’s memory  
capacity.  
When the toner runs out, you can order the following type of toner cartridge  
for your printer:  
AVERAGE YIELDA  
Average continuous black T272J (Black)  
cartridge yield: 2,500  
standard pages (Black)  
Average continuous  
colored cartridge yield:  
2,000 standard pages  
(Yellow/Magenta/Cyan)  
TYPE  
PART NUMBER  
Optional tray 2  
If you are  
P955J  
experiencing  
Standard yield  
toner cartridge  
frequent paper  
supply problems,  
you can attach an  
additional 500 sheet  
tray. You can print  
documents in  
various sizes and  
types of print  
materials.  
P586K (Cyan)  
K756K (Magenta)  
M802K (Yellow)  
High yield  
toner cartridge  
Average continuous black R717J (Black)  
cartridge yield: 5,500  
standard pages (Black)  
Average continuous  
colored cartridge yield:  
5,000 standard pages  
(Yellow/Magenta/Cyan)  
P587K (Cyan)  
K757K (Magenta)  
M803K (Yellow)  
Hard Disk  
Allows you to  
N573K  
enhance the printer’s  
capability and print in  
various ways.  
Your printer may have two memory slots with a factory pre-installed  
memory module in one slot. When you are expanding the memory  
capacity, you can add a memory module to the vacant memory slot,  
according to the table above. It is strongly recommended that you  
expand a memory module in vacant memory slot only, without  
removing a pre-installed memory module. If your printer has 128 MB  
memory capacity and you want to add 256 MB, the memory capacity  
expands up to 384 MB.  
Paper transfer  
belt  
Approx. 50,000  
U265J  
When the transfer belt has  
worn out with abrasion, you  
need to change it. By this  
time you may be notified with  
the transfer belt-related  
message on the display.  
a.Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.  
HOW TO PURCHASE  
When purchasing new print cartridges or other supplies, these must  
be purchased in the same country where the printer was purchased.  
Otherwise, print cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with  
your printer, as configurations of print cartridges and other supplies  
vary, depending on the specific country.  
To order Dell-authorized supplies or accessories, contact your local Dell  
dealer or the retailer where you purchased your printer, or visit  
www.dell.com or support.dell.com and select your country/region to  
obtain information on calling for technical support.  
Ordering supplies and accessories | 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
installing accessories  
Your printer is a full-featured model that has been optimized to meet most of your printing needs. Recognizing that each user may  
have different requirements, however, Dell makes several accessories available to enhance your printer’s capabilities.  
This chapter includes:  
PRECAUTIONS TO TAKE WHEN INSTALLING  
ACCESSORIES  
UPGRADING A MEMORY MODULE  
Your printer has a dual in-line memory module (DIMM). Use this memory  
module slot to install additional memory.  
Disconnect the power cord  
The printer has two memory slots with a factory pre-installed memory  
module in one slot. When you are expanding the memory capacity, you can  
add a memory module to the vacant memory slot. It is strongly  
recommended that you expand a memory module in vacant memory slot  
only without removing a pre-installed memory module (see "Ordering  
Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on.  
To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the  
power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external  
accessories.  
Discharge static electricity  
The control board and internal accessories (network interface card or  
memory module) are sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or  
removing any internal accessories, discharge static electricity from your  
body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on any  
device plugged into a grounded power source. If you walk around before  
finishing the installation, repeat this procedure to discharge any static  
electricity again.  
Installing a memory module  
1. Turn the printer off and unplug all cables from the printer.  
2. Release the screws and remove the rear cover.  
Activating the added accessories in the PS driver properties.  
After installing an accessory such as an optional tray, PS driver users  
must do the additional setting. Go to the PS printer properties and set  
the added accessory activated.  
When installing accessories, battery inside the printer is a service  
component. Do not change it by yourself.  
Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose  
used batteries according to the instructions.  
ACTIVATING THE ADDED ACCESSORIES IN  
PRINTER PROPERTIES  
3. Release the screws, then lift up the cover slightly and pull the cover to  
the right.  
After installing added accessories, you need to select it in the printer  
properties of the printer driver in order to use it.  
1. Install the driver (see "Installing the software" on page 19).  
2. Click the Windows Start menu.  
For Windows 2000, select Settings  
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.  
For Windows Vista/2008, select Control Panel Hardware and  
Sound Printers.  
3. Select the your printer’s driver and right-click to open Properties.  
For PS driver, select PS driver and right-click to open Properties.  
4. In printer driver properties, select Device Options.  
For PS driver, select Device Settings.  
5. In printer driver properties, set the necessary options.  
Printers.  
1 Control board  
cover  
If you want to remove an existing memory module, push the two  
latches at the ends of the module outward.  
For PS driver, select the Installable Options section and set the  
necessary options.  
6. Click OK.  
4. Take out a new memory module from the plastic bag.  
84 | Installing accessories  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5. Holding the memory module by the edges, align the memory module on  
the slot at about a 30-degree tilt. Ensure that the notches of the module  
and the grooves on the slot fit each other.  
USING THE HARD DISK  
Installing the hard disk allows the data from your computer to be sent to the  
print queue of the printer hard disk. This decreases the workload of the  
computer. You can also use various print features, such as storing a job in  
the hard disk, proofing a job, and printing private documents.  
Installing the hard disk  
For order information, see "Accessories" on page 83. Review the  
precautions on page 84.  
1. Turn the printer off and unplug all cables from the printer.  
2. Release the screws and remove the rear cover.  
The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match those  
on an actual memory module and its slot.  
6. Press the memory module into the slot with care until you hear a 'click'.  
3. Open the control board cover. Release the screws, then lift up the cover  
slightly and pull the cover to the right.  
Do not press the memory module strongly or the module may be  
damaged. If the module does not seem to fit into the slot properly,  
carefully try the previous procedure again.  
7. Replace the control board cover and fasten the cover with the screws.  
1 control board  
cover  
4. Align the connector on the hard disk with the connector on the control  
board. Push the hard disk in until it is latched into place  
.
8. Replace the rear cover and fasten the cover with the screw.  
9. Reconnect the power cord and printer cable, and turn the printer on.  
To release the memory module, pull the two tabs on the sides of  
the slot outwards, then the module springs out.  
10. If you use the PS driver, you must activate the added memory in the PS  
driver properties.  
Installing accessories | 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5. Fasten the screws supplied with your new hard disk.  
6. Enter the user’s name and file name.  
7. Click OK until the Print window is displayed.  
8. Click OK or Print to start printing.  
Printing a stored job  
You can print jobs currently stored in the hard disk.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Store Job appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the user’s name and file name you  
want appear and press OK.  
5. If the select file is a confidential print job, enter the specified 4-digit  
password.  
Press the left/right arrow to enter the first digit and press OK. The  
cursor automatically moves to the next digit position. Enter the 2nd,  
3rd, and 4th digit in the same way.  
6. Replace the control board cover and fasten the cover with the screws.  
6. When Print appears, press OK.  
If you enter the incorrect password, Invalid Password appears.  
Reenter the correct password.  
7. Press the left/right arrow until the number of copies you want  
appears and press OK.  
8. Press OK. Printing starts.  
Deleting a stored job  
You can delete jobs currently stored in the hard disk.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Store Job appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the user’s name and file name you  
want appear and press OK.  
7. Replace the rear cover and fasten the cover with the screw.  
8. Reconnect the power cord and printer cable, and turn the printer on.  
9. Print a configuration page from the control panel to check if the hard disk  
is correctly installed. See "Printing reports" on page 55.  
10. If you use the PS driver, you must activate the added hard disk in the PS  
5. If the select file is a confidential print job, enter the specified 4-digit  
password.  
driver properties.  
Press the left/right arrow to enter the first digit and press OK. The  
cursor automatically moves to the next digit position. Enter the 2nd,  
3rd, and 4th digit in the same way.  
Printing with the optional hard disk  
After installing the optional hard disk, you can use advanced printing  
features, such as storing or spooling a print job to the hard disk, proofing a  
job, and specifying of printing a private job in the printer properties window.  
6. Press the left/right arrow until Delete appears and press OK.  
If you enter the incorrect password, Invalid Password appears.  
Reenter the correct password.  
7. When Yes appears, press OK.  
Once you have stored files in the hard disk, you can easily print or delete  
the stored files using the control panel of your printer.  
Controlling the active job queue  
Storing a job  
You can store jobs in the installed hard disk.  
1. Open the file you want to store.  
2. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window displays.  
All of the print jobs waiting to be printed are listed in the Active Job  
Queue in the order you sent them to the printer. You can delete a job  
from the queue before printing, or promote a job to print sooner.  
To delete a file from the queue:  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
3. Click Properties. If you see Setup, Print or Options, click the  
button instead.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Active Job appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the user’s name and file name you  
want appear and press OK.  
5. If the select file is a confidential print job, enter the specified 4-digit  
password.  
4. Click the Other Options tab and click Job type.  
5. Select the print mode you want from the drop-down list.  
Normal: Prints in normal mode.  
Proof: Prints the first file and after a pause prints the next file.  
Confidentical: Stores the files, securing them with a password.  
Store: Stores the file to the hard disk.  
Spool: Spools the file into the hard disk and prints it from the hard  
disk queue.  
Press the left/right arrow to enter the first digit and press OK. The  
cursor automatically moves to the next digit position. Enter the 2nd,  
3rd, and 4th digit in the same way.  
Delay: Prints the file at a specified time.  
86 | Installing accessories  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6. Press the left/right arrow until Cancel appears and press OK.  
If you enter the incorrect password, Invalid Password appears.  
Reenter the correct password.  
5. Press the left/right arrow until Select Form appears and press OK.  
6. Press OK when 1st Form appears.  
7. Press the left/right arrow until the form file you want appears and  
press OK.  
7. Press the left/right arrow until Yes appears and press OK.  
If you select Double Form, continue the next step.  
8. Press the left/right arrow until 2nd Form appears and press OK.  
9. Press the left/right arrow until the form file for the second form  
appears and press OK.  
To promote a file from the queue:  
You can select a job waiting in the Active Job Queue and change its  
print order so that it can be printed sooner.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Active Job appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the user’s name and file name you  
want appear and press OK.  
5. If the select file is a confidential print job, enter the specified 4-digit  
password.  
File policy  
You can choose the file policy for generating file name before you proceed  
with the job through hard disk. If the hard disk memory already has the  
same name when you entered a new file name, you can rename or  
overwrite it.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until File Policy appears and press OK.  
Press the left/right arrow to enter the first digit and press OK. The  
cursor automatically moves to the next digit position. Enter the 2nd,  
3rd, and 4th digit in the same way.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the job setting you want appears and  
press OK.  
6. Press the left/right arrow until Promote appears and press OK.  
If you enter the incorrect password, Invalid Password appears.  
Reenter the correct password.  
Rename: If the hard disk memory already has the same name when  
you enter a new file name, the file will be saved as a different name  
that is automatically programmed.  
To print a file immediately:  
You can print a job scheduled to be printed at a specified time  
immediately. In this case, the job currently printing is stopped and the  
selected job will be printed. This function is available when the job is  
scheduled for later printing.  
Overwrite: You can set the printer to delete previous job information  
on hard disk as you store new job information.  
5. Press OK.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
Deleting residual image data  
ImageOverwrite is a security measure for customers who are concerned  
about unauthorized access and duplication of classified or private  
document.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until Active Job appears and press OK.  
4. Press the left/right arrow until the user’s name and file name you  
want appear and press OK.  
5. If the select file is a confidential print job, enter the specified 4-digit  
password.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until ImageOverwrite appears and press  
OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the job setting you want appears and  
press OK.  
Press the left/right arrow to enter the first digit and press OK. The  
cursor automatically moves to the next digit position. Enter the 2nd,  
3rd, and 4th digit in the same way.  
6. Press the left/right arrow until Release appears and press OK.  
This option appears only when you select a Delay print job. See  
Immediate: All residual image data from the printer will be erased  
immediately after each job has been processed.  
On Demand: This option provides an on-demand facility for a  
system administrator to erase all the real image data remained in  
hard disk after this option enabled. All existing jobs will be deleted  
regardless of their status and all job submissions will be prohibited  
for the duration of the overwrite.  
If you enter the incorrect password, Invalid Password appears.  
Reenter the correct password.  
Printing using the form files  
You can store up to 10 form files in the hard disk and make them printed  
with your document.  
First, you need to create a form file using the printer driver. See the  
Software section.  
4. Press the left/right arrow to move to On or Off for Immediate.  
Press the left/right arrow to move to Enable or Disable for On  
Demand.  
If you selected On Demand enabled, the printer confirms if the  
overwrite feature starts now. Press the left/right arrow to select  
Yes or No. If you select Yes, On Demand overwrite starts as soon  
as you select Yes. If you select No, this feature will be enabled.  
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of  
the display and press OK.  
2. Press the left/right arrow until Form Menu appears and press OK.  
3. Press the left/right arrow until the form you want appears and press OK  
.
5. Press OK.  
•Off: Prints in normal mode.  
•Single Form: Prints all page using the first form.  
•Double Form: Prints the front page using the first form and the  
back page using the second form.  
4. Press Back ( ) to return to the upper menu level.  
Installing accessories | 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
specifications  
This chapter guides you about this printer’s specifications such as various features.  
This chapter include:  
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS  
ITEM  
DESCRIPTION  
The symbol * optional feature depending on printers.  
Toner  
cartridge lifeb  
Black  
Average continuous black cartridge  
yield: 5,500 standard pages  
(Shipped with 2,500 pages Starter  
toner cartridge.)  
ITEM  
DESCRIPTION  
Color  
Average continuous colored cartridge  
yield: 5,000 standard pages  
(Shipped with 2,000 pages Starter  
toner cartridge.)  
Up to 50 sheets 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)  
DADF Capacity  
(Yellow/  
Magenta/  
Cyan)  
DADF  
Width: 148 (5.8 inches) to 216 (8.5 inches) mm  
document size Length: 148 (5.8 inches) to 356 (14 inches) mm  
Paper transfer  
belt  
Approx. 50,000 pages (A4, Letter)  
Tray: 250 sheets for plain paper, 75 g/m2 (20 lb  
bond)  
Paper input  
capacity  
Memory  
(Expandable)*  
128 MB (max. 384 MB)  
Multi-purpose tray: 100 sheets for plain paper, 75 g/  
m2 (20 lb bond)  
Optional tray: 500 sheets for plain paper, 75 g/m2  
(20 lb bond)  
External  
dimension  
(W x D x H)  
468 x 498 x 651 mm  
(18.4 x 19.6 x 25.6 inches) without optional tray  
For details about paper input capacity, see 25 page.  
Face down: 170 sheets 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)  
Paper output  
capacity  
Weight  
(Including  
consumables)  
36 kg (79.37 lbs)  
Power rating  
AC 110 - 127 V or AC 220 - 240 V  
See the Rating label on the printer for the correct  
voltage, frequency (hertz) and type of current for your  
printer.  
Package  
weight  
Paper: 5.8 Kg (12.7 lbs)  
Plastic: 1.8 Kg (3.9 lbs)  
Duty cycle  
(Monthly)  
Up to 65,000 pages  
Power  
consumption  
Average operating mode: Less than 580 W  
Ready mode: Less than 82 W  
Power save mode: Less than 18 W  
Power off mode: 0 W  
Fusing  
temperature  
180 °C (356 °F)  
Noise Levela  
Ready mode: Less than 32 dBA  
Printing mode: Less than 53 dBA  
Copying mode: Less than 54 dBA  
a.Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779  
b.Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798. The number of  
pages may be affected by operating environment, printing interval,  
media type, and media size.  
Default time to 20 Minutes  
power save  
mode from  
ready mode  
Boot-up time  
Less than 49 seconds  
The boot-up time will be longer, if data volume is a lot in  
the HDD.  
Operating  
environment  
Temperature: 15 to 32.5 °C (59 to 90.5 °F)  
Humidity: 20 to 80% RH  
Display  
16 characters x 2 lines  
88 | Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS  
SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS  
ITEM  
DESCRIPTION  
ITEM  
DESCRIPTION  
Compatibility  
TWAIN standard/WIA standard  
Color CCD  
Printing method  
Printing speeda  
Color laser beam printing  
Up to 20 ppm (A4), 21 ppm (Letter)  
Up to 7 ipm (A4/Letter)  
Scanning method  
Resolutiona  
TWAIN  
Optical: Up to 600 x 1,200 dpi  
Enhanced: Up to 4,800 x 4,800  
dpi  
Duplex printing  
speed  
standard/  
WIA standard  
From ready: Less than 25 seconds  
From coldboot: Less than 75 seconds  
Black &  
White  
First print out  
time  
Scan to USB  
100, 200, 300 dpi  
100, 200, 300 dpi  
Scan to E-  
mail  
From ready: Less than 25 seconds  
From coldboot: Less than 75 seconds  
Color  
Scan to PC  
75, 150, 200, 300, 600 dpi  
Print resolution  
Printer language  
Max. 2,400 x 600 dpi effective output  
SPL, PostScript 3, PCL5ce and PCL6  
PDF, TIFF, JPEGb, BMP  
Network Scan  
File format  
Effective  
scanning length  
Scanner glass: 289 mm (11.38 inches)  
DADF: 348 mm (13.7 inches)  
OS compatibilityb  
Windows: 2000/XP/2003/2008/Vista  
Linux: RedHat 8.0~9.0, Mandrake 9.2~10.1,  
SuSE 8.2~9.2, Fedra Core 1~4  
Effective  
scanning width  
Max. 208 mm (8.2 inches)  
Macintosh: Mac OS X 10.3~10.5, Universal Mac  
Interface  
High speed USB 2.0  
Ethernet 10/100 Base TX (embedded type)  
Color bit depth  
Internal: 36 bit  
External: 24 bit  
Mono bit depth  
1 bit for black & white mode  
8 bit for gray scale  
a.It will be affected by operating system used, computing performance,  
application software, connecting method, media type, media size and  
job complexity.  
b.Visit www.dell.com to download the latest software version.  
a.Due to the applications for scanning, the maximum resolution might  
differ.  
b.JPEG is not available when you select the mono mode in scan color.  
COPIER SPECIFICATIONS  
ITEM  
DESCRIPTION  
Copy Speeda  
Up to 20 cpm (A4), 21 cpm (Letter)  
Copy  
resolution  
Text  
DADF: Up to 600 x 600 dpi  
Scanner glass: Up to 600 x 600 dpi  
Text/photo Up to 600 x 600 dpi  
Magazine  
Photo  
Up to 600 x 600 dpi  
DADF: Up to 600 x 600 dpi  
Scanner glass: Up to 1,200 x 1,200  
dpi  
Zoom range  
DADF: 25% to 100%  
Scanner glass: 25% to 400%  
a.Copy speed is based on Single Document Multiple Copy.  
Specifications | 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
FACSIMILE SPECIFICATIONS  
ITEM  
DESCRIPTION  
Compatibility  
Applicable line  
ITU-T G3  
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) or  
behind PABX  
Data coding  
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG  
33.6 Kbps  
Modem speed  
Up to 3 seconds/pagea  
Transmission  
speed  
Maximum  
356 mm  
document length  
Resolution  
Color  
Black  
200 x 200 dpi  
Standard: Up to 203 x 98 dpi  
Fine: Up to 203 x 196 dpi  
Super Fine: Up to 300 x 300 dpi  
(Receiving only)  
Memory  
Halftone  
4 MB (Approx. 200 pages)  
256 levels  
a.Standard resolution, MMR(JBIG), Maximum modem speed, Phase ”C”  
by ITU-T No. 1 chart, Memory Tx, ECM.  
90 | Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
appendix  
DELL TECHNICAL SUPPORT POLICY  
Technician-assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation of the customer in the troubleshooting process and provides for restoration of the  
Operating System, application software and hardware drivers to the original default configuration as shipped from Dell, as well as the verification of appropriate  
functionality of the printer and all Dell-installed hardware. In addition to this technician assisted technical support, online technical support is available at Dell  
Support. Additional technical support options may be available for purchase.  
Dell provides limited technical support for the printer and any Dell-installed software and peripherals. Support for third-party software and peripherals is provided by  
the original manufacturer, including those purchased and/or installed through Software & Peripherals (DellWare), ReadyWare, and Custom Factory Integration  
(CFI/DellPlus).  
CONTACTING DELL  
You can access Dell Support at support.dell.com. Select your region on the WELCOME TO DELL SUPPORT page, and fill in the requested details to access help  
tools and information.  
You can contact Dell electronically using the following addresses:  
World Wide Web  
www.dell.com/ap/ (Asian/Pacific countries only)  
www.dell.com/jp/ (Japan only)  
www.euro.dell.com (Europe only)  
www.dell.com/la/ (Latin American and Caribbean countries)  
www.dell.ca (Canada only)  
Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP)  
Log in as user: anonymous, and use your email address as your password.  
Electronic Support Service  
[email protected] (Latin America and Caribbean countries only)  
[email protected] (Asian/Pacific countries only)  
support.jp.dell.com (Japan only)  
support.euro.dell.com (Europe only)  
Electronic Quote Service  
[email protected] (Asian/Pacific countries only)  
[email protected] (Canada only)  
WARRANTY AND RETURN POLICY  
Dell Inc. (“Dell”) manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new in accordance with industry-standard practices.  
For information about the Dell warranty for your printer, refer to the Product Information Guide.  
Appendix | 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
glossary  
DADF  
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by  
understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well  
as mentioned in this user's guide.  
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a mechanism that will  
automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that the  
printer can scan on both sides of the paper.  
ADF  
Default  
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a mechanism that will  
automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the printer can scan  
some amount of the paper at once.  
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box  
state, reset, or initialized.  
DHCP  
AppleTalk  
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server  
networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters  
specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information  
required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also  
provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.  
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for  
computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984)  
and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.  
BIT Depth  
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to  
represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color  
depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits  
increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for  
a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and  
white.  
DIMM  
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds  
memory. DIMM stores all the data within the printer like printing data,  
received fax data.  
DNS  
BMP  
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information  
associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks,  
such as the Internet.  
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows  
graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file  
format on that platform.  
Dot Matrix Printer  
BOOTP  
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head  
that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an  
ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.  
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to  
obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap  
process of computers or operating systems running on them. The  
BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each  
client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP  
address prior to loading any advanced operating system.  
DPI  
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for  
scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher  
resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.  
CCD  
DRPD  
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan  
job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to  
prevent any damage when you move the printer.  
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone  
company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to  
answer several different telephone numbers.  
Collation  
Duplex  
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When  
collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing  
additional copies.  
A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that the  
printer can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped  
with a Duplex can print double-sided of paper.  
Control Panel  
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or  
monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of  
the printer.  
Duty Cycle  
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer  
performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation  
such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of  
print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty  
cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer  
limits 2,400 pages a day.  
Coverage  
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing.  
For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5%  
image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or  
lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a  
toner usage will be as much as the coverage.  
ECM  
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into  
Class 1 fax printers or fax modems. It automatically detects and corrects  
errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by  
telephone line noise.  
CSV  
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to  
exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is  
used in Microsoft Excel, has become a pseudo standard throughout the  
industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.  
Emulation  
Emulation is a technique of one printer obtaining the same results as  
another.  
92 | Glossary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different  
system, so that the second system behaves like the first system.  
Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is  
in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the  
system being simulated, often considering its internal state.  
Intranet  
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and  
possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of  
an organization's information or operations with its employees.  
Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal  
website.  
Ethernet  
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local  
area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical  
layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control  
(MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized  
as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN technology in  
use during the 1990s to the present.  
IP address  
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in  
order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing  
the Internet Protocol standard.  
IPM  
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a  
printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer  
can complete within one minute.  
EtherTalk  
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer  
networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now  
deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.  
IPP  
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for  
printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so  
forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of  
printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and  
encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution  
than older ones.  
FDI  
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the printer to  
allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card  
reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your printer.  
FTP  
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for  
exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol  
(such as the Internet or an intranet).  
IPX/SPX  
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet  
Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare  
operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services  
similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and  
SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for  
local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this  
purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).  
Fuser Unit  
The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media. It  
consists of a hot roller and a back-up roller. After toner is transferred  
onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that  
the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm  
when it comes out of a laser printer.  
ISO  
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an  
international standard-setting body composed of representatives from  
national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and  
commercial standards.  
Gateway  
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer  
network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a  
network that allows access to another computer or network.  
ITU-T  
Grayscale  
The International Telecommunication Union is an international  
organization established to standardize and regulate international radio  
and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization,  
allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection  
arrangements between different countries to allow international phone  
calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication.  
A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image  
when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented  
by various shades of gray.  
Halftone  
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots.  
Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter  
areas consist of a smaller number of dots.  
ITU-T No. 1 chart  
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile  
transmissions.  
HDD  
JBIG  
Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard  
disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data  
on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.  
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression  
standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for  
compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be  
used on other images.  
IEEE  
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an  
international non-profit, professional organization for the advancement  
of technology related to electricity.  
JPEG  
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used  
standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the  
format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide  
Web.  
IEEE 1284  
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of  
Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to  
a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to  
the peripheral (for example, a printer).  
LDAP  
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking  
protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/  
IP.  
Glossary | 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LED  
PABX  
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates  
the status of a printer.  
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone  
switching system within a private enterprise.  
MAC address  
PCL  
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated  
with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually  
written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-  
34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface  
Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers trying to  
locate printers on large networks.  
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language  
(PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an  
industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has  
been released in varying levels for thermal, matrix printer, and page  
printers.  
PDF  
MFP  
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed  
by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a  
device independent and resolution independent format.  
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office printer that includes the  
following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a  
copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.  
PostScript  
MH  
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming  
language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. -  
that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.  
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the  
amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax printers to  
transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-  
based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress  
white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this  
minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.  
Printer Driver  
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer  
to the printer.  
MMR  
Print Media  
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method  
recommended by ITU-T T.6.  
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can  
be used on a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.  
Modem  
PPM  
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information,  
and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted  
information.  
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining  
how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can  
produce in one minute.  
MR  
PRN file  
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T  
T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is  
compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the  
differences are encoded and transmitted.  
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the  
device driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies  
many tasks.  
Protocol  
NetWare  
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,  
communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.  
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used  
cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the  
network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack.  
Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.  
PS  
See PostScript.  
OPC  
PSTN  
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual  
image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is  
usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped.  
An exposing unit of a drum is slowly worn away by its usage of the  
printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets scratches  
from grits of a paper.  
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the  
world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial  
premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.  
Resolution  
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The  
higher the dpi, the greater the resolution.  
Originals  
SMB  
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text,  
etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but  
which is not itself copied or derived from something else.  
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to  
share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications  
between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-  
process communication mechanism.  
OSI  
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the  
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications.  
OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides  
the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained,  
functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application,  
Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical.  
SMTP  
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail  
transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-  
based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are  
specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-server  
protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server.  
94 | Glossary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Subnet Mask  
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to  
determine which part of the address is the network address and which  
part is the host address.  
TCP/IP  
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP);  
the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack  
on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.  
TCR  
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each  
transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of  
pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after  
failed transmissions.  
TIFF  
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped  
image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from  
scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the  
characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and  
platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been  
made by various image processing applications.  
Toner Cartridge  
A kind of bottle within a printer like printer which contains toner. Toner is  
a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms the text  
and images on the printed paper. Toner can be melted by the heat of the  
fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.  
TWAIN  
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-  
compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be  
initiated from within the program.; an image capture API for Microsoft  
Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.  
UNC Path  
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network  
shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a  
UNC path is: \\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>  
URL  
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents  
and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates  
what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the  
domain name where the resource is located.  
USB  
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the  
USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals.  
Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a  
single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.  
Watermark  
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears  
lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first  
introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by  
papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps,  
currency, and other government documents to discourage  
counterfeiting.  
WIA  
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is  
originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be  
initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant  
scanner.  
Glossary | 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
index  
display language, change 20  
A
K
driver  
accessories  
installing  
key sound 21  
installation 19  
hard disk 85  
Address Book  
group dial numbers 50  
DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection)  
L
LED  
speed buttons 49  
speed dial numbers 50  
E
Linux problems 80  
loading originals  
edge erase, special copy 34  
Address Book, use 39  
adjustment  
F
fax header, set 43  
Fax mode, receiving mode 45  
fax number, set 43  
faxing  
alarm sound 21  
M
Ans/Fax mode, receiving mode 45  
Maintenance  
maintenance parts 62  
toner cartridge 58  
C
default settings, change 49  
delayed faxes 46  
fax setup 48  
Multiple Send faxes 46  
priority faxes 47  
characters, enter 21  
margin shift, special copy 34  
memory module  
cleaning  
installing 84  
ordering 83  
memory, clear 56  
sending faxes 44  
clock mode 20  
collation, special copy 32  
control panel 13  
copying  
Multiple Sned faxes 46  
Forwarding 47  
N
network  
G
2-up, 4-up 32  
Group dial numbers, set 50  
setting up 17  
H
O
hard disk  
optional tray 62, 83  
ID card copy 32  
margin shift 34  
original type 31  
installing 85  
use 86  
originals  
jam, clear 63  
I
ID card, special copy 32  
P
installing accessories  
hard disk 85  
paper  
D
changing the size 27  
loading in the optional tray 27  
loading in the tray1 27  
DADF 12  
J
jam  
DADF rubber pad, replace 62  
DADF, load 23  
clearing paper from the tray1 65  
tips for avoiding paper jams 63  
paper tray, set  
date and time, set 20  
default mode, change 20  
delayed fax 46  
jam, clear  
paper type  
setting 30  
job timeout, set 22  
demo page, print 17  
96 | Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PostScript  
scanning  
default setting, change 39  
to email 38  
power save mode 21  
print quality problems, solve 75  
printer ID, set 43  
USB flash memory 52  
secure receiving mode 46  
printing  
sending a fax  
automatically 44  
demo page 17  
setting  
priority fax 47  
sounds, set 21  
problem, solve  
faxing 78  
paper feeding 73  
printing quality 75  
Windows 79  
speaker sound 21  
speaker volume 21  
special copy features 32  
speed buttons, set 49  
speed dial numbers, set 50  
supplies  
R
receiving a fax  
in Ans/Fax mode 45  
in DRPD mode 45  
in Fax mode 45  
T
Tel mode, receiving mode 45  
in Secure Receiving mode 46  
toner cartridge  
replacing 60  
receiving modes 44  
tray  
redialing  
adjusting the width and length 27  
automatically 44  
U
replacing  
USB flash memory  
DADF rubber pad 62  
data backup 53  
managing 54  
printing 53  
replacing components  
toner cartridge 59  
replacing, toner cartridge 60  
reports, print 55  
using  
SetIP 18  
ringer 21  
V
S
volume, adjust  
scan power save mode 22  
scanner glass  
cleaning 58  
W
Windows problems 79  
Index | 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
© 2009 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.  
This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.  
Dell is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.  
Dell and Dell logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.  
PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.  
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.  
PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System, Inc.  
UFST® and MicroType™ are registered trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc.  
TrueType, LaserWriter and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.  
All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Software section  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SOFTWARE SECTION  
CONTENTS  
Chapter 2: BASIC PRINTING  
Chapter 3: ADVANCED PRINTING  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4: USING WINDOWS POSTSCRIPT DRIVER  
Chapter 5: SHARING THE PRINTER LOCALLY  
Chapter 6: SCANNING  
Chapter 7: USING OTHER SOFTWARE  
Chapter 8: USING YOUR PRINTER IN LINUX  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9: USING YOUR PRINTER WITH A MACINTOSH  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Typical Installation  
1
Installing Printer  
Software in Windows  
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary  
for printer operations will be installed.  
1
2
Ensure that the printer is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
This chapter includes:  
Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into your computer’s  
optical drive.  
The CD should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and  
NOTE: The following procedure is based on Microsoft®  
Windows® XP, for other operating systems, refer to the  
corresponding Windows user's guide or online help.  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the  
letter which represents your drive and click OK  
.
If you use Windows Vista®, click Start  
All programs  
Accessories Run, and type X:\Setup.exe  
.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click  
Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and  
click Continue in the User Account Control window.  
3
Click Next.  
Installing Printer Software  
You can install the printer software for local printing or network  
printing. To install the printer software on the computer,  
perform the appropriate installation procedure depending on  
the printer in use.  
A printer driver is software that allows your computer to  
communicate with your printer. The procedure to install drivers  
may differ depending on the operating system you are using.  
All applications should be closed on your computer before  
beginning installation.  
Installing Software for Local Printing  
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
A local printer is a printer directly attached to your computer  
using the printer cable supplied with your printer, such as a  
USB or parallel cable. If your printer is attached to a network,  
4
Select Typical installation for a local printer. Click  
Next  
.
You can install the printer software using the typical or custom  
method.  
NOTE: If the “New Hardware Wizard” window appears during  
the installation procedure, click  
in the upper right corner of  
the window to close the window, or click Cancel  
.
4
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
®
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click  
Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and  
click Continue in the User Account Control window.  
NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the  
computer, the following window will appear.  
3
Click Next.  
• After connecting the printer, click Next  
.
• If you do not want to connect the printer at this time, click  
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation  
will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the  
installation.  
• The installation window that appears in this User’s  
Guide may differ depending on the printer and  
interface in use.  
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
Select Custom installation. Click Next  
4
.
5
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to  
print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test  
page, select the checkbox and click Next  
.
Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 7.  
6
7
If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes  
.
If not, click No to reprint it.  
C
lick Finish.  
NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver does not  
work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See "Reinstalling  
5
Select your printer and click Next.  
Custom Installation  
You can choose individual components to install.  
1
2
Ensure that the printer is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into your computer’s  
optical drive.  
The CD should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the  
letter which represents your drive and click OK  
.
®
If you use Windows Vista , click Start  
All programs  
Accessories  
Run, and type X:\Setup.exe.  
5
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing Software for Network  
Printing  
NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the  
computer, the following window will appear.  
When you connect your printer to a network, you must first  
configure the TCP/IP settings for the printer. After you have  
assigned and verified the TCP/IP settings, you are ready to  
install the software on each computer on the network.  
You can install the printer software using the typical or custom  
method.  
Typical Installation  
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary  
for printer operations will be installed.  
1
Ensure that the printer is connected to your network and  
powered on. For details about connecting to the network,  
see the Getting started chapter.  
• After connecting the printer, click Next  
.
2
Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into your computer’s  
optical drive.  
The CD should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
• If you do not want to connect the printer at this time, click  
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation  
will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the  
installation.  
• The installation window that appears in this User’s  
Guide may differ depending on the printer and  
interface in use.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the  
letter which represents your drive and click OK  
.
®
If you use Windows Vista , click Start  
All programs  
Accessories  
Run, and type X:\Setup.exe.  
6
Select the components to be installed and click Next.  
®
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista , click  
Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and  
click Continue in the User Account Control window.  
3
Click Next.  
NOTE: You can change the desired installation folder by  
clicking [Browse].  
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
7
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to  
print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test  
page, select the checkbox and click Next  
.
Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 9.  
8
9
If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes  
.
If not, click No to reprint it.  
C
lick Finish.  
6
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
Select Typical installation for a network printer. Click  
Next  
.
NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver does not  
work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See "Reinstalling  
Custom Installation  
You can choose individual components to install and set a  
specific IP address.  
1
Ensure that the printer is connected to your network and  
powered on. For details about connecting to the network,  
see the Getting started chapter.  
2
Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into your computer’s  
optical drive.  
The CD should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
5
The list of printers available on the network appears.  
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the  
click Next  
.
letter which represents your drive and click OK  
.
®
If you use Windows Vista , click Start  
All programs  
Accessories  
Run, and type X:\Setup.exe.  
®
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista , click  
Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and  
click Continue in the User Account Control window.  
3
Click Next.  
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to  
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your  
printer to the network. To add the printer to the  
network, enter the port name and the IP address for the  
printer.  
To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address,  
print a Network Configuration page in machine.  
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select  
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name  
manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse  
button.  
NOTE: If you cannot find your machine in the network, please  
turn off the firewall and click Update  
For Windows operating system, click Start  
.
Control Panel  
and start windows firewall, and set this option unactivated.  
For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.  
6
Click Finish.  
7
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Select Custom installation. Click Next.  
TIP: If you want to set a specific IP address on a specific  
network printer, click the Set IP Address button. The Set IP  
Address window appears. Do as follows:  
5
The list of printers available on the network appears.  
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then  
click Next  
.
a. Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the  
list.  
b. Configure an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway for the  
printer manually and click Configure to set the specific IP  
address for the network printer.  
c. Click Next  
.
6
Select the components to be installed. After selecting the  
components, the following window appears. You can also  
change the printer name, set the printer to be shared on  
the network, set the printer as the default printer, and  
change the port name of each printer. Click Next  
.
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to  
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your  
printer to the network. To add the printer to the  
network, enter the port name and the IP address for the  
printer.  
To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address,  
print a Network Configuration page in machine.  
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select  
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name  
manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse  
button.  
To install this software on a server, select the Setting up  
this printer on a server checkbox.  
Click Finish.  
NOTE: If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn  
off the firewall and click Update  
For Windows operating system, click Start  
.
7
Control Panel  
and start windows firewall, and set this option unactivated.  
For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.  
NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver does not  
work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See "Reinstalling  
8
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the  
computer, the following window will appear.  
Reinstalling Printer Software  
You can reinstall the software if installation fails.  
1
2
Start Windows.  
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs  
your printer driver name  
Maintenance.  
3
4
Select Repair and click Next  
.
The list of printers available on the network appears.  
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then  
click Next  
.
• After connecting the printer, click Next  
.
• If you do not want to connect the printer at this time, click  
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation  
will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the  
installation.  
• The reinstallation window that appears in this User’s  
Guide may differ depending on the printer and  
interface in use.  
5
Select the components you want to reinstall and click  
Next  
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to  
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your  
printer to the network. To add the printer to the  
network, enter the port name and the IP address for the  
printer.  
.
If you installed the printer software for local printing  
and you select your printer driver name, the window  
asking you to print a test page appears. Do as follows:  
a. To print a test page, select the check box and click  
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select  
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name  
manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse  
button.  
Next  
.
b. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes  
.
If it do not, click No to reprint it.  
You will see a component list so that you can reinstall any  
item individually.  
6
When the reinstallation is done, click Finish  
.
Removing Printer Software  
1
2
Start Windows.  
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs  
your printer driver name  
Maintenance.  
3
Select Remove and click Next  
.
You will see a component list so that you can remove any  
item individually.  
4
5
Select the components you want to remove and then click  
Next  
When your computer asks you to confirm your selection,  
click Yes  
.
.
The selected driver and all of its components are removed  
from your computer.  
After the software is removed, click Finish  
.
9
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The basic print settings are selected within the Print  
window. These settings include the number of copies and  
print range.  
2
Basic Printing  
This chapter explains the printing options and common printing  
tasks in Windows.  
This chapter includes:  
Ensure that your  
printer is selected.  
3
4
Select your printer driver from the Name drop-down  
list.  
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your  
printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the  
application’s Print window. For details, see “Printer  
If you see Setup Printer, or Options in your Print  
,
window, click it instead. Then click Properties on the next  
screen.  
Click OK to close the printer properties window.  
To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print  
window.  
Printing a Document  
NOTES  
:
• Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this  
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
However the composition of the printer properties window is  
similar.  
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible  
with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility  
section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s  
Guide.  
Printing to a file (PRN)  
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file for your  
purpose.  
To create a file:  
1
Check the Print to file box in the Print window.  
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can  
check the supplied Drivers and Utilities CD.  
• When you select an option in printer properties, you may see  
an exclamation mark or mark. An exclamation mark  
means you can select that certain option but it is not  
recommended, and mark means you cannot select that  
option due to the machine’s setting or environment.  
The following procedure describes the general steps required  
for printing from various Windows applications. The exact steps  
for printing a document may vary depending on the application  
program you are using. See the User’s Guide of your software  
application for the exact printing procedure.  
1
2
Open the document you want to print.  
2
3
Click Print  
Enter the folder name and assign a name of the file and  
then click OK  
.
Select Print from the File menu. The Print window is  
displayed. It may look slightly different depending on your  
application.  
.
4
Basic Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Layout Tab  
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document  
appears on the printed page. The Layout Options includes  
Printer Settings  
Multiple Pages per Side  
Printing. See “Printing a Document” on page 4 for more  
,
Poster Printing and Booklet  
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to  
access all of the printer options you need when using your  
printer. When the printer properties are displayed, you can  
review and change the settings needed for your print job.  
Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your  
operating system. This Software User’s Guide shows the  
Properties window for Windows XP.  
Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this  
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
If you access printer properties through the Printers folder, you  
can view additional Windows-based tabs (refer to your  
Windows User’s Guide) and the Printer tab (see “Printer Tab” on  
page 8).  
NOTES  
:
• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify  
in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in  
the software application first, and change any remaining  
settings using the printer driver.  
• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are  
using the current program. To make your changes  
permanent, make them in the Printers folder.  
• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other  
Windows operating systems, see the corresponding Windows  
User's Guide or online help.  
Paper Orientation  
Paper Orientation allows you to select the direction in which  
information is printed on a page.  
Portrait prints across the width of the page, letter style.  
Landscape prints across the length of the page, spreadsheet  
style.  
1. Click the Windows Start button.  
2. Select Printers and Faxes  
.
3. Select your printer driver icon.  
4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select  
Rotate allows you to rotate the page the selected degrees.  
Printing Preferences  
.
5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.  
Landscape  
Portrait  
Layout Options  
Layout Options allows you to select advanced printing options.  
You can choose Multiple Pages per Side and Poster Printing  
.
Double-sided Printing  
Double-sided Printing allows you to print on both sides of  
paper. If this option does not appear, your printer does  
not have this feature.  
5
Basic Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Cotton Paper: 20 lb to 24 lb (75~90 g/m2) cotton paper such  
as Gilbert 25 % and Gilbert 100 %.  
Archive Paper: When you need to keep print-out for a long  
period time such as archives, select this option.  
Plain Paper: Normal plain paper. Select this type if your  
printer is monochrome and printing on the 16 lb (60 g/m2)  
cotton paper.  
Paper Tab  
Use the following options to set the basic paper handling  
specifications when you access the printer properties. See  
“Printing a Document” on page 4 for more information on  
Click the Paper tab to access various paper properties.  
Recycled Paper: 20 lb to 24 lb (75~90 g/m2) recycled paper.  
Color Paper: 20 lb to 24 lb (75~90 g/m2) color-  
backgrounded paper.  
First Page  
This property allows you to print the first page using a different  
paper type from the rest of the document. You can select the  
paper source for the first page.  
For example, load thick stock for the first page into the Multi-  
purpose Tray, and plain paper into Tray n. Then, select Tray n in  
the Source option and Multi-Purpose Tray in the First Page  
option. If this option does not appear, your printer does  
not have this feature.  
Scaling Printing  
Scaling Printing allows you to automatically or manually scale  
your print job on a page. You can choose from None  
,
Reduce/  
Enlarge, and Fit to Page  
.
Copies  
Copies allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed.  
You can select 1 to 999 copies.  
Paper Options  
Size  
Size allows you to set the size of paper you loaded in the tray.  
If the required size is not listed in the Size box, click Custom  
.
When the Custom Paper Setting window appears, set the paper  
size and click OK. The setting appears in the list so that you can  
select it.  
Source  
Ensure that Source is set to the corresponding paper tray.  
Use Multi-Purpose Tray when printing on special materials like  
envelopes and transparencies. You have to load one sheet at a  
time into the Manual Tray or Multi-Purpose Tray.  
If the paper source is set to Auto Selection, the printer  
automatically picks up print material in the following tray order:  
Manual Tray or Multi-Purpose Tray, Tray n.  
Type  
Set Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from  
which you want to print. This will let you get the best quality  
printout. If not, print quality may not be acheived as you want.  
Thin Paper: Less than 19 lb (70 g/m2) thin paper.  
Thick Paper: 24 lb to 32 lb (90~120 g/m2) thick paper.  
Bond Paper When you use the bond paper, select this  
:
option.  
6
Basic Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
-
Download as Outline: When this option is selected, the  
driver will download any TrueType fonts that are used in your  
document not already stored (resident) on your printer. If,  
after printing a document, you find that the fonts did not print  
correctly, choose Download as bit image and resubmit your  
print job. The Download as bit image setting is often useful  
when printing Adobe. This feature is available only  
when you use the PCL 6 printer driver.  
Graphics Tab  
Use the following Graphic options to adjust the print quality for  
your specific printing needs. See “Printing a Document” on  
Click the Graphic tab to display the properties shown below.  
-
-
Download as Bitmap: When this option is selected, the  
driver will download the font data as bitmap images.  
Documents with complicated fonts, such as Korean or  
Chinese, or various other fonts, will print faster in this  
setting.This feature is available only when you use  
the PCL 6 printer driver.  
Print as Graphics: When this option is selected, the driver  
will download any fonts as graphics. When printing documents  
with high graphic content and relatively few TrueType fonts,  
printing performance (speed) may be enhanced in this  
setting. This feature is available only when you use  
the PCL 6 printer driver.  
Print all text in black: When the Print all text in black  
option is checked, all text in your document prints solid black,  
regardless of the color it appears on the screen.  
Print All Text To Darken: When the Print All Text To  
Darken option is checked, all text in your document is allowed  
to print darker than on a normal document.  
Quality  
The Quality options you can select may vary depending  
on your printer model. The higher the setting, the sharper the  
clarity of printed characters and graphics. The higher setting also  
may increase the time it takes to print a document.  
Grayscale Enhancement: Press the Smart Color tab. It  
allows users to preserve the details of nature photos, and  
improve contrast and readability among grayscale colors,  
when printing color documents in grayscale.  
Color Mode  
Fine Edge: Press the Smart Color tab. It allows users to  
emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving  
readability and align each color channel registration in color  
printing mode.  
You can choose color options. Setting to Color typically produces  
the best possible print quality for color documents. If you want to  
print a color document in grayscale, select Grayscale. If you  
want to adjust the color options manually, select Manual and  
click the Color Adjust or Color Matching button.  
Copies Setting : In order to use this option, first you need to  
set total number of copies from Paper tab. When you make  
several copies, and if you want to print some copies in color and  
some in grayscale, use this option and select the number of  
copies in grayscale.  
Color Adjust : You can adjust the appearance of images by  
changing the settings in the Levels option.  
Color Matching : You can adjust the appearance of images by  
changing the settings in the Settings option.  
Advanced Options  
You can set advanced settings by clicking the Advanced  
Options button.  
Raster Compression: This option determines the  
compression level of images for transferring data from a  
computer to a printer. If you set this option to Maximum, the  
printing speed will be high, but the printing quality will be low.  
This feature is available only when you use the PCL 6  
printer driver.  
TrueType Options: This option determines what the driver  
tells the printer about how to image the text in your document.  
Select the appropriate setting according to the status of your  
document. This feature is available only when you use  
the PCL 6 printer driver.  
7
Basic Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
the Output to area, and type the file name and specify the path.  
This feature is available only when you use the PCL 6  
printer driver.  
Other Options Tab  
You can select output options for your document. See “Printing  
a Document” on page 4 for more information about accessing  
the printer properties.  
Job type  
Click the Other Options tab to access the following feature:  
Job Setting dialog allows you to select how to print or save the  
printing file by using the optional HDD. Some printers do not  
support this feature.  
Using Onscreen Help File  
• For more information about Job type, click  
at the top  
right corner of the window. The Job type Help window  
opens and allows you to view onscreen help supplied on the  
Job type  
.
About Tab  
Use the About tab to display the copyright notice and the  
version number of the driver. If you have an Internet browser,  
you can connect to the Internet by clicking on the web site icon.  
about accessing printer properties.  
Watermark  
You can create a background text image to be printed on each  
page of your document. For details, see “Using Watermarks” on  
Printer Tab  
If you access printer properties through the Printers folder,  
you can view the Printer tab. You can set the printer  
configuration.  
Overlay  
Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and  
letterhead paper. For details, see “Using Overlays” on page 14.  
The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows  
OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online  
help.  
Output Options  
Print Subset: You can set the sequence in which the pages  
1
2
3
4
Click the Windows Start menu.  
Select Printers and Faxes  
print. Select the print order from the drop-down list.  
.
-
-
-
-
Normal (1,2,3): Your printer prints all pages from the first  
page to the last page.  
Reverse All Pages (3,2,1): Your printer prints all pages  
from the last page to the first page.  
Print Odd Pages: Your printer prints only the odd  
numbered pages of the document.  
Select your printer driver icon.  
Right-click on the printer driver icon and select  
Properties  
.
5
Click the Printer tab and set the options.  
Print Even Pages: Your printer prints only the even  
numbered pages of the document.  
Use Printer Fonts: When Use Printer Fonts is checked, the  
printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory (resident  
fonts) to print your document, rather than downloading the  
fonts used in your document. Because downloading fonts takes  
time, selecting this option can speed up your printing time.  
When using Printer fonts, the printer will try to match the fonts  
used in your document to those stored in its memory. If,  
however, you use fonts in your document that are very different  
from those resident in the printer, your printed output will  
appear very different from what it looks like on the screen.  
This feature is available only when you use the PCL 6  
printer driver.  
Save as Form for Overlay: Select Save as Form for Overlay to  
save the document as a form file (C:\FORMOVER\*.FOM). Once  
this option is selected, the printer driver requires the file name  
and the destination path each time you print. If you want to  
preset the file name and specify the path, click on the button in  
8
Basic Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using a Favorite Setting  
The Favorites option, which is visible on each properties tab,  
allows you to save the current properties settings for future  
use.  
To save a Favorites item:  
1
2
Change the settings as needed on each tab.  
Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box.  
3
Click Save.  
When you save Favorites, all current driver settings are  
saved.  
To use a saved setting, select the item from the Favorites drop  
down list. The printer is now set to print according to the  
Favorites setting you selected.  
To delete a Favorites item, select it from the list and click  
Delete  
.
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by  
selecting Printer Default from the list.  
Using Help  
Your printer has a help screen that can be activated by clicking  
the Help button in the printer properties window. These help  
screens give detailed information about the printer features  
provided by the printer driver.  
You can also click  
from the upper right corner of the window,  
and then click on any setting.  
9
Basic Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3
Advanced Printing  
This chapter explains printing options and advanced printing  
tasks.  
Printing Multiple Pages on One  
Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing)  
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet  
of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will  
be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You  
can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.  
1
3
2
4
NOTE  
:
• Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this  
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
However the composition of the printer properties window is  
similar.  
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can  
check the supplied Drivers and Utilities CD.  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
3
From the Layout tab, choose Multiple Pages per Side in  
the Layout Type drop-down list.  
Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet  
(1, 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) in the Pages per Side drop-down  
list.  
This chapter includes:  
4
Select the page order from the Page Order drop-down  
list, if necessary.  
Check Print Page Border to print a border around each  
page on the sheet.  
Click the Paper tab, select the paper source, size, and  
type.  
5
6
Click OK and print the document.  
10  
Advanced Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Printing Posters  
Printing Booklets  
This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4,  
9, or 16 sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets  
together to form one poster-size document.  
9
9
8
8
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
This printer feature allows you to print your document on both  
sides of the paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can  
be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet.  
3
Click the Layout tab, select Poster Printing in the  
Layout Type drop-down list.  
Configure the poster option:  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access the printer properties. See “Printing a  
You can select the page layout from Poster<2x2>  
,
Poster<3x3> Poster<4x4> or Custom. If you select  
,
From the Layout tab, choose Booklet Printing from the  
Layout Type drop-down list.  
Poster<2x2>, the output will be automatically stretched  
to cover 4 physical pages. If the option is set to Custom,  
you can enlarge the original from 150% to 400%.  
Depending on the level of the enlargement, the page  
NOTE: The Booklet Printing option is not available for all  
paper sizes. In order to find out the available paper size for  
this feature, select the paper size in the Size option on the  
Paper tab, then check if the Booklet Printing in a Layout  
Type drop-down list on the Layout tab is activated.  
layout is automatically adjusted to Poster<2x2>  
,
Poster<3x3> Poster<4x4>  
,
.
3
Click the Paper tab, and select the paper source, size, and  
type.  
4
5
Click OK and print the document.  
After printing, fold and staple the pages.  
Specify an overlap in millimeters or inches to make it  
easier to pasting the sheets together.  
0.15 inches  
0.15 inches  
4
5
Click the Paper tab, select the paper source, size, and  
type.  
Click OK and print the document. You can complete the  
poster by pasting the sheets together.  
11  
Advanced Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Printing on Both Sides of Paper  
Printing a Reduced or Enlarged  
Document  
You can print on both sides of a sheet of paper. Before printing,  
decide how you want your document oriented.  
You can change the size of a page’s content to appear larger or  
smaller on the printed page.  
The options are:  
Printer Setting, if you select this option, this feature is  
determined by the setting you’ve made on the control  
panel of the printer. If this option does not appear,  
your printer does not have this feature.  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
3
From the Paper tab, select Reduce/Enlarge in the  
Output size drop-down list.  
Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box.  
None  
Long Edge, which is the conventional layout used in  
book binding.  
You can also click the  
or  
button.  
Short Edge, which is the type often used with calendars.  
4
5
Select the paper source, size, and type in Paper Options  
.
2
Click OK and print the document.  
2
3
2
5
3
3
2
5
5
3
5
Fitting Your Document to a  
Selected Paper Size  
Long Edge  
Short Edge  
Reverse Duplex Printing, allows you to select general  
print order compare to duplex print order. If this option  
does not appear, your printer does not have this  
feature.  
This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any  
selected paper size regardless of the digital document size. This  
can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small  
document.  
A
NOTE: Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies,  
envelopes, or thick paper. Paper jamming and damage to the  
printer may result.  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
3
From the Paper tab, select Fit to Page in the Output  
size drop-down list.  
Select the correct size from the Output size drop-down  
list.  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. “Printing a  
4
5
Select the paper source, size, and type in Paper Options.  
3
From the Layout tab, select the paper orientation.  
Click OK and print the document.  
From the Double-sided Printing section, select the  
binding option you want.  
4
5
Click the Paper tab and select the paper source, size, and  
type.  
Click OK and print the document.  
NOTE: If your printer does not have a duplex unit, you should  
complete the printing job manually. The printer prints every  
other page of the document first. After printing the first side of  
your job, the Printing Tip window appears. Follow the on-  
screen instructions to complete the printing job.  
12  
Advanced Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Editing a Watermark  
Using Watermarks  
1
3
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
Click the Other Options tab and click the Edit button in  
the Watermark section. The Edit Watermark window  
appears.  
Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current  
Watermarks list and change the watermark message and  
options.  
The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing  
document. For example, you may want to have large gray  
letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally  
across the first page or all pages of a document.  
There are several predefined watermarks that come with the  
printer, and they can be modified, or you can add new ones to  
the list.  
4
5
Click Update to save the changes.  
Click OK until you exit the Print window.  
Using an Existing Watermark  
1
3
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
Click the Other Options tab, and select the desired  
watermark from the Watermark drop-down list. You will  
see the selected watermark in the preview image.  
Deleting a Watermark  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
From the Other Options tab, click the Edit button in the  
Watermark section. The Edit Watermark window  
appears.  
Click OK and start printing.  
NOTE: The preview image shows how the page will look when  
it is printed.  
3
4
Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current  
Watermarks list and click Delete  
Click OK until you exit the Print window.  
.
Creating a Watermark  
1
3
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
Click the Other Options tab, and click the Edit button in  
the Watermark section. The Edit Watermark window  
appears.  
Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box.  
You can enter up to 40 characters. The message displays  
in the preview window.  
When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark  
prints on the first page only.  
4
Select watermark options.  
You can select the font name, style, size, or grayscale  
level from the Font Attributes section and set the angle  
of the watermark from the Message Angle section.  
5
6
Click Add to add a new watermark to the list.  
When you have finished editing, click OK and start  
printing.  
To stop printing the watermark, select (No Watermark) from  
the Watermark drop-down list.  
13  
Advanced Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Using a Page Overlay  
After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with  
your document. To print an overlay with a document:  
Using Overlays  
1
2
Create or open the document you want to print.  
What is an Overlay?  
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer’s hard  
disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on  
any document. Overlays are often used to take the place of  
preprinted forms and letterhead paper. Rather than using  
preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing the  
exact same information that is currently on your letterhead. To  
print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need  
to load preprinted letterhead paper in the printer. You can use  
your printer to print the letterhead overlay on your document.  
Dear ABC  
4
Click the Other Options tab.  
Select the desired overlay from the Overlay drop-down  
list box.  
If the overlay file you want does not appear in the  
Overlay list, click Edit button and Load Overlay, and  
select the overlay file.  
Regards  
WORLD BEST  
5
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an  
external source, you can also load the file when you access  
the Load Overlay window.  
Creating a New Page Overlay  
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay  
containing your logo or image.  
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the  
Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the  
overlay from the Overlay List box.  
If necessary, click Confirm Page Overlay When  
Printing. If this box is checked, a message window  
appears each time you submit a document for printing,  
asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on  
your document.  
1
Create or open a document containing text or an image for  
use in a new page overlay. Position the items exactly as  
you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay.  
6
7
WORLD BEST  
2
3
To save the document as an overlay, access printer  
Click the Other Options tab, and click Edit button in the  
Overlay section.  
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been  
selected, the overlay automatically prints with your  
document.  
4
5
In the Edit Overlay window, click Create Overlay.  
Click OK or Yes until printing begins.  
In the Create Overlay window, type a name of up to  
eight characters in the File name box. Select the  
destination path, if necessary. (The default is  
C:\Formover).  
The selected overlay downloads with your print job and  
prints on your document.  
6
7
Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List box.  
Click OK or Yes to finish creating.  
NOTE: The resolution of the overlay document must be the  
same as that of the document you will print with the overlay.  
The file is not printed. Instead it is stored on your  
computer hard disk drive.  
Deleting a Page Overlay  
You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.  
NOTE: The overlay document size must be the same as the  
documents you print with the overlay. Do not create an  
overlay with a watermark.  
1
In the printer properties window, click the Other Options  
tab.  
2
3
Click the Edit button in the Overlay section.  
Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay  
List box.  
4
5
6
Click Delete Overlay.  
When a confirming message window appears, click Yes  
.
Click OK until you exit the Print window.  
14  
Advanced Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Advanced  
You can use advanced settings by clicking the Advanced  
button.  
4
Using Windows  
PostScript Driver  
If you want to use the PostScript driver provided with your  
Drivers and Utilities CD to print a document.  
PPDs, in combination with the PostScript driver, access printer  
features and allow the computer to communicate with the  
printer. An installation program for the PPDs is provided on the  
supplied Drivers and Utilities CD.  
Printer Settings  
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to  
access all of the printer options you need when using your  
printer. When the printer properties are displayed, you can  
review and change the settings needed for your print job.  
Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your  
operating system. This Software User’s Guide shows the  
Properties window for Microsoft® Windows® XP.  
Paper/Output this option allows you to select the size of the  
paper loaded in the tray.  
Graphic this option allows you to adjust the print quality for  
your specific printing needs.  
Document Options this options allow you to set the PostScript  
options or printer features.  
Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this  
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
NOTES  
:
• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify  
in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in  
the software application first, and change any remaining  
settings using the printer driver.  
• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are  
using the current program. To make your changes  
permanent, make them in the Printers folder.  
Using Help  
You can click  
then click on any setting.  
from the upper right corner of the window, and  
• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other  
Windows operating systems, see the corresponding Windows  
User's Guide or online help.  
1. Click the Windows Start button.  
2. Select Printers and Faxes.  
3. Select your printer driver icon.  
4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select  
Printing Preferences.  
5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.  
15  
Using Windows PostScript Driver  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5
Sharing the Printer  
Locally  
You can connect the printer directly to a selected computer,  
which is called “host computer,” on the network.  
The following procedure is for Microsoft® Windows® XP. For  
other Windows operating systems, see the corresponding  
Windows User's Guide or online help.  
Setting Up a Host Computer  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Start Windows.  
From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes  
.
Double-click your printer driver icon  
.
From the Printer menu, select Sharing  
Check the Share this printer box.  
.
Fill in the Shared Name field, and then click OK  
.
NOTE  
:
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible with  
your printer. See the operating systems Compatibility  
section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.  
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can  
check the supplied Drivers and Utilities CD.  
Setting Up a Client Computer  
1
2
Right-click the Windows Start button and select Explore  
.
Select My Network Places and then right-click Search  
for Computers  
.
3
Fill in the IP address of host computer in Computer name  
field, and click Search. (In case host computer requires  
User name and Password, fill in User ID and password  
of host computer account.)  
4
5
6
Double-click Printers and Faxes  
Right-click printer driver icon, select Connect  
Click Yes, if the installation confirm message appears.  
.
.
16  
Sharing the Printer Locally  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6
Scanning  
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into  
digital files on your computer. Then you can fax or e-mail the  
files, display them on your web site or use them to create  
projects that you can print using SmarThru software or the WIA  
driver.  
Smarthru Office  
The supplied Drivers and Utilities CD provides you with  
SmarThru Office SmarThru Office offers you convenient  
.
features to use with your machine.  
Starting SmarThru Office  
This chapter includes:  
Follow the steps below to start SmarThru Office  
:
1
2
3
Ensure that your printer and computer are turned on and  
properly connected to each other.  
Once you have installed SmarThru Office, you will see  
the SmarThru Office icon on your desktop.  
NOTE  
:
• Check the operating system(s) that are compatible  
with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility  
section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s  
Guide.  
Double-click the SmarThru Office icon.  
• You can check your printer name in the supplied  
Drivers and Utilities CD.  
4
The SmarThru Office starts.  
For more information, click Help  
• The maximum resolution that can be achieved  
depends upon various factors, including computer  
speed, available disk space, memory, the size of the  
image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus,  
depending on your system and what you are scanning,  
you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions,  
especially using enhanced dpi.  
SmarThru Office help.  
Quick Start Guide  
This menu displays direct buttons for some features. The direct  
buttons include: Categories Binder Life Cycle Scan and  
OCR Fix and Enhance, and Dell Website. You can disable  
,
,
,
,
this menu by checking “Do not show this diaglog again.  
Using SmarThru Office  
Scanning  
1
Click scan icon.  
NOTES  
:
• In Microsoft® Windows® XP operating system, you can use  
SmarThru Office launcher, which is on the right end of  
taskbar, to easily open the Scan Setting window.  
• In other operating systems beside Windows XP, click the  
SmarThru icon  
in the tray area of the windows taskbar  
to activate the SmarThru Office launcher.  
17  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Fax  
2
Scan Setting window opens.  
You can send emails while working on SmarThru Office  
.
NOTE: You need an email client program, such as Outlook  
Express, to send email in SmarThru Office. Procedure for  
sending email may differ depending on email client program  
you are using.  
1
2
3
Select File  
Send Fax window opens.  
Type in necessary information and click Send Fax  
Send to  
Send By Fax.  
.
NOTE: For more information about SmarThru Office, click  
Help SmarThru Office help. The SmarThru Office Help  
window appears; you can view on screen help supplied on the  
SmarThru program.  
Follow the steps below to uninstall SmarThru Office. Before  
you begin the uninstall, ensure that all applications are closed  
on your computer.  
Select  
Scanner  
Allows you to select between the Local or  
Network scanner.  
1
2
Allows you to save settings frequently used  
for future use. Click New Profile to save the  
setting.  
Select  
Profile  
a) From the Start menu, select Programs or All  
Programs  
b) Select SmarThru Office, and then select Uninstall  
SmarThru Office  
c) When your computer asks you to confirm your selection,  
read the statement and click OK  
d) Click Finish  
.
Scan  
Settings  
Allows you to customize settings for Scan  
Size and Paper Source.  
.
3
4
.
Allows you to customize settings for File  
Name and location to send scanned data.  
.
Scan To  
NOTE: Click Advanced button to set more scan options.  
3
Set scan settings and click Scan. For more information,  
click Help SmarThru Office help  
.
Send to  
Email  
You can send email while working on SmarThru Office  
.
NOTE: You need an email client program, such as Outlook  
Express, to send email in SmarThru Office. Procedure for  
sending email may differ depending on email client program  
you are using.  
1
2
3
Select File  
An email client opens.  
Type in necessary information and send your email.  
Send to  
Send By E-mail.  
18  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scanning Process with TWAIN-  
enabled Software  
Scanning Using the WIA Driver  
Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition  
(WIA) driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard  
components provided by MicrosoftWindowsXP and works  
with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the  
WIA driver allows you to scan and easily manipulate images  
without using additional software.  
If you want to scan documents using other software, you will  
need to use TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe®  
Photoshop®. The first time you scan with your machine, select  
it as your TWAIN source in the application you use.  
The basic scanning process involves a number of steps:  
NOTE: The WIA driver works only on Windows XP/Vista with  
USB port.  
1
2
Ensure that your machine and computer are turned on and  
properly connected to each other.  
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF.  
Windows XP  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document  
glass.  
Open an application, such as Photoshop.  
Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options.  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
1
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF.  
OR  
3
4
5
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
From the Start menu on your desktop window, select  
2
Settings  
,
Control Panel, and then Scanners and  
Cameras  
.
NOTE: You need to follow the program’s instructions for  
acquiring an image. See the user’s guide of the application.  
3
4
Double click your scanner driver icon. The Scanner and  
Camera Wizard launches.  
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to  
see how your preferences affect the picture.  
5
6
Click Next.  
Enter a picture name, and select a file format and  
destination to save the picture.  
7
Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it  
is copied to your computer.  
Windows Vista  
1
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
2
3
Click Start  
Scanners and Cameras  
Control Panel  
Hardware and Sound  
.
Click on Scan a document or picture. Then Windows  
Fax and Scan application is opened automatically.  
NOTE  
:
To view scanners, user can click on View scanners and  
cameras  
If there is not Scan a document or picture, open the MS paint  
program and click From Scanner or Camera... on File menu.  
.
4
5
Click New Scan and then scan driver is opened.  
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to  
see your preferences affect the picture.  
6
Click Scan.  
NOTE: If you want to cancel the scan job, press the Cancel  
button on the Scanner and Camera Wizard.  
19  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
7
Using other software  
Printer Settings Utility  
When you install the Dell software, the Printer Settings Utility  
is automatically installed.  
To open the Printer Settings Utility.  
Using the Dell™ Toner  
Management System  
1
Click Start  
your printer driver name  
Programs  
DELL  
DELL Printers  
Printer Settings Utility  
.
The Printer Settings Utility window opens.  
The printer status monitor displays the status of the printer  
(printer ready, printer offline, and error-check printer) and the  
toner level (100%, 50%, Toner Low) for your printer.  
Printer Status Monitor  
The printer status monitor screen launches when you send a  
print job to the printer. This only appears on the computer  
screen. Depending on the remaining toner level, the launched  
printer status monitor screen is different.  
If you are a Windows user, from the Start menu, select  
Programs  
DELL  
DELL Printers  
your printer driver  
name Printer Status Monitor  
.
2
The Printer Settings Utility window provides several  
features.  
For more information, click the  
button.  
To use the default settings, click the Printer Default  
button and click Apply button.  
To exit, click the Exit button at the bottom of the window.  
Printing Status: The Printer Status Monitor displays  
the current status of the printer.  
Toner Level: You can view the level of toner remaining  
in the toner cartridge.  
Order Supplies: Click to order replacement toner  
cartridges online.  
User’s Guide: Allows you to view the User’s Guide.  
20  
Using other software  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Dell Toner Re-order application  
Fireware Update Utility  
To order replacement toner cartridges or supplies from Dell  
:
You can printer Firmware Update Utility.  
1
Double-click the Dell Toner Reorder Program icon on your  
desktop. (Windows only)  
1
Click Start  
your printer driver name  
Programs  
DELL  
DELL Printers  
Firmware Update Utility  
.
The Firmware Update Utility window opens.  
OR  
Click Start  
your printer driver name  
Reorder  
Programs  
DELL  
DELL Printers  
Dell 2145cn MFP Toner  
.
2
The Dell 2145cn MFP Toner Reorder window opens.  
Follow the on screen istructions to complete the firmware  
update.  
21  
Using other software  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8
Using Your Printer in  
Linux  
Installing the Unified Linux  
Driver  
You can use your machine in a Linux environment.  
Installing the Unified Linux Driver  
1
Ensure that you connect your machine to your computer.  
Turn both the computer and the machine on.  
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in  
root in the Login field and enter the system password.  
This chapter includes:  
2
NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the  
printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system  
administrator.  
3
Insert the printer Drivers and Utilities CD. The CD will  
automatically run.  
If the CD does not automatically run, click the  
the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal screen  
appears, type in:  
icon at  
Getting Started  
The supplied Drivers and Utilities CD provides you with Dell’s  
Unified Linux Driver package for using your machine with a  
Linux computer.  
If the CD-ROM is secondary master and the location to  
mount is /mnt/cdrom,  
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/  
cdrom  
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux  
[root@localhost root]#./install.sh  
Dell’s Unified Linux Driver package contains printer and scanner  
drivers, providing the ability to print documents and scan  
images. The package also delivers powerful applications for  
configuring your machine and further processing of the scanned  
documents.  
If you still failed to run the Drivers and Utilities CD, type  
the followings in sequence:  
[root@localhost root]#umount /dev/hdc  
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/  
cdrom  
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the driver  
package allows you to monitor a number of machine devices via  
fast ECP parallel ports and USB simultaneously.  
The acquired documents can then be edited, printed on the  
same local or network machine devices, sent by e-mail,  
uploaded to an FTP site, or transferred to an external OCR  
system.  
NOTE: The installation program runs automatically if you  
have an autorun software package installed and configured.  
The Unified Linux Driver package is supplied with a smart and  
flexible installation program. You do not need to search for  
additional components that might be necessary for the Unified  
Linux Driver software: all required packages will be carried onto  
your system and installed automatically; this is possible on a  
wide set of the most popular Linux clones.  
4
When the welcome screen appears, click Next.  
22  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5
When the installation is complete, click Finish.  
Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver  
1
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in  
root in the Login field and enter the system password.  
NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the  
printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system  
administrator.  
2
Insert the printer Drivers and Utilities CD. The CD will  
automatically run.  
If the CD does not automatically run, click the  
the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal screen  
appears, type in:  
icon at  
The installation program has added the Unified Driver  
Configurator desktop icon and Dell Unified Driver group  
to the system menu for your convenience. If you have  
any difficulties, consult the onscreen help that is available  
through your system menu or can otherwise be called  
from the driver package windows applications, such as  
If the CD-ROM is secondary master and the location to  
mount is /mnt/cdrom,  
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/  
cdrom  
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux  
[root@localhost root]#./uninstall.sh  
Unified Driver Configurator or Image Manager  
.
NOTE: Installing the driver in the text mode:  
• If you do not use the graphical interface or have failed the  
driver installation, you have to use the driver in the text  
mode.  
NOTE: The installation program runs automatically if you  
have an autorun software package installed and configured.  
• Follow the step 1 to 3, then type [root@localhost Linux]# ./  
install.sh, then follow the instruction on the terminal screen.  
Then the installation completes.  
• When you wan to uninstall the driver, follow the installation  
instruction above, but type [root@localhost Linux]# ./  
uninstall.sh on the terminal screen.  
3
4
Click Uninstall  
Click Next  
.
.
5
Click Finish.  
23  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using the Unified Driver  
Configurator  
Printers Configuration button  
Ports Configuration button  
Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for  
configuring Printer or MFP devices. Since an MFP device  
combines the printer and scanner, the Unified Linux Driver  
Configurator provides options logically grouped for printer and  
scanner functions. There is also a special MFP port option  
responsible for the regulation of access to an MFP printer and  
scanner via a single I/O channel.  
After installing the Unified Linux driver, the Unified Linux Driver  
Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop.  
Opening the Unified Driver  
Configurator  
You can use the onscreen help by clicking Help  
After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the  
Unified Driver Configurator.  
.
1
Double-click Unified Driver Configurator on the  
desktop.  
3
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Dell  
Unified Driver and then Unified Driver Configurator  
Press each button on the Modules pane to switch to the  
corresponding configuration window.  
.
2
Printers Configuration button  
Scanners Configuration button  
Ports Configuration button  
24  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Classes Tab  
The Classes tab shows a list of available printer classes.  
Printers Configuration  
Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes  
.
Printers Tab  
You can see the current system’s printer configuration by  
clicking on the printer icon button on the left side of the Unified  
Driver Configurator window.  
Shows all of the  
printer classes.  
Switches to Printer  
configuration.  
Shows all of the  
installed printer.  
Shows the status of the  
class and the number of  
printers in the class.  
Shows the status,  
model name and  
URI of your printer.  
Refresh : Renews the classes list.  
Add Class... : Allows you to add a new printer class.  
Remove Class : Removes the selected printer class.  
You can use the following printer control buttons:  
Refresh: renews the available printers list.  
Add Printer: allows you to add a new printer.  
Remove Printer: removes the selected printer.  
Scanners Configuration  
In this window, you can monitor the activity of scanner devices,  
view a list of installed Dell MFP devices, change device  
properties, and scan images.  
Set as Default: sets the current printer as a default  
printer.  
Stop/Start: stops/starts the printer.  
Test: allows you to print a test page to check if the  
machine is working properly.  
Properties: allows you to view and change the printer  
properties. For details, see page 26.  
Switches to  
Scanners  
configuration.  
Shows all of the  
installed scanners.  
Shows the vendor,  
model name and type  
of your scanner.  
Properties... : Allows you to change the scan properties  
and scan a document. See page 28.  
25  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Ports Configuration  
In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check  
the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in busy  
state when its owner is terminated for any reason.  
Configuring Printer Properties  
Using the properties window provided by the Printers  
configuration, you can change the various properties for your  
machine as a printer.  
1
Open the Unified Driver Configurator.  
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.  
2
3
Select your machine on the available printers list and click  
Switches to  
ports  
configuration.  
Properties  
.
The Printer Properties window opens.  
Shows all of the  
available ports.  
Shows the port type,  
device connected to  
the port and status  
Refresh : Renews the available ports list.  
Release port : Releases the selected port.  
Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners  
The following five tabs display at the top of the window:  
Your machine may be connected to a host computer via the  
parallel port or USB port. Since the MFP device contains more  
than one device (printer and scanner), it is necessary to  
organize proper access of “consumer” applications to these  
devices via the single I/O port.  
General: allows you to change the printer location and  
name. The name entered in this tab displays on the  
printer list in Printers configuration.  
Connection: allows you to view or select another port. If  
you change the printer port from USB to parallel or vice  
versa while in use, you must re-configure the printer port  
in this tab.  
The Dell Unified Linux Driver package provides an appropriate  
port sharing mechanism that is used by Dell printer and  
scanner drivers. The drivers address their devices via so-called  
MFP ports. The current status of any MFP port can be viewed  
via the Ports Configuration. The port sharing prevents you from  
accessing one functional block of the MFP device, while another  
block is in use.  
Driver: allows you to view or select another printer  
driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default  
device options.  
Jobs: shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to  
cancel the selected job and select the Show completed  
jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list.  
Classes: shows the class that your printer is in. Click  
Add to Class to add your printer to a specific class or  
click Remove from Class to remove the printer from the  
selected class.  
When you install a new MFP device onto your system, it is  
strongly recommended you do this with the assistance of an  
Unified Driver Configurator. In this case you will be asked to  
choose I/O port for the new device. This choice will provide the  
most suitable configuration for MFP’s functionality. For MFP  
scanners I/O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers  
automatically, so proper settings are applied by default.  
4
Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer  
Properties Window.  
26  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The following four tabs display at the top of the window.  
General - allows you to change the paper size, the paper  
type, and the orientation of the documents, enables the  
duplex feature, adds start and end banners, and changes  
the number of pages per sheet.  
Printing a Document  
Printing from Applications  
There are a lot of Linux applications that you are allowed to  
print from using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You  
can print on your machine from any such application.  
Text - allows you to specify the page margins and set the  
text options, such as spacing or columns.  
Graphics - allows you to set image options that are used  
when printing images/files, such as color options, image  
size, or image position.  
1
From the application you are using, select Print from the  
File menu.  
Device: allows you to set the print resolution, paper  
source, and destination.  
2
3
Select Print directly using lpr  
In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your  
machine from the Printer list and click Properties  
.
5
Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties  
window.  
Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing.  
.
6
7
The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the  
status of your print job.  
Click.  
To abort the current job, click Cancel  
.
Printing Files  
You can print many different types of files on the Dell machine  
device using the standard CUPS way - directly from the  
command line interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you do that.  
But the drivers package replaces the standard lpr tool by a  
much more user-friendly LPR GUI program.  
To print any document file:  
1
Type lpr <file_name> from the Linux shell command  
line and press Enter. The LPR GUI window appears.  
4
Change the printer and print job properties.  
When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select  
file(s) to print window appears first. Just select any files  
you want to print and click Open  
.
2
3
In the LPR GUI window, select your printer from the list,  
and change the printer and print job properties.  
For details about the properties window, see page 27.  
Click OK to start printing.  
27  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
The document is scanned and the image preview appears  
in the Preview Pane.  
Scanning a Document  
You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator  
window.  
1
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your  
desktop.  
2
3
Click the  
button to switch to Scanners Configuration.  
Select the scanner on the list.  
Drag the pointer to  
set the image area  
to be scanned.  
Click your  
scanner.  
7
Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan  
Area sections.  
Image Quality: allows you to select the color  
composition and the scan resolution for the image.  
Scan Area: allows you to select the page size. The  
Advanced button enables you to set the page size  
manually.  
If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings,  
select from the Job Type drop-down list. For details about  
the preset Job Type settings, see page 29.  
When you have only one MFP device and it is connected  
to the computer and turned on, your scanner appears on  
the list and is automatically selected.  
You can restore the default setting for the scan options  
by clicking Default  
When you have finished, click Scan to start scanning.  
.
If you have two or more scanners attached to your  
computer, you can select any scanner to work at any  
time. For example, while acquisition is in progress on the  
first scanner, you may select the second scanner, set the  
device options and start the image acquisition  
simultaneously.  
8
9
The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window  
to show you the progress of the scan. To cancel scanning,  
click Cancel  
.
The scanned image appears in the new Image Manager  
tab.  
4
5
Click Properties.  
Load the document to be scanned face up into the ADF  
(Automatic Document Feeder) or face down on the  
document glass.  
6
Click Preview in the Scanner Properties window.  
If you want to edit the scanned image, use the toolbar.  
For further details about editing an image, see page 29.  
28  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
You can use the following tools to edit the image:  
Tools Function  
Saves the image.  
10When you are finished, click Save on the toolbar.  
11Select the file directory where you want to save the image  
and enter the file name.  
12Click Save.  
Adding Job Type Settings  
You can save your scan option settings to retrieve for a later  
scanning.  
Cancels your last action.  
To save a new Job Type setting:  
1
2
3
4
Change the options from the Scanner Properties window.  
Click Save As  
Enter the name for your setting.  
Click OK  
Restores the action you canceled.  
Allows you to scroll through the image.  
.
.
Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop-down  
list.  
Crops the selected image area.  
Zooms the image out.  
To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job:  
1
Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type drop-  
down list.  
The next time you open the Scanner Properties window,  
the saved setting is automatically selected for the scan  
job.  
2
Zooms the image in.  
To delete a Job Type setting:  
1
Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type  
drop-down list.  
Allows you to scale the image size; you can  
enter the size manually, or set the rate to  
scale proportionally, vertically, or  
horizontally.  
2
Click Delete  
.
The setting is deleted from the list  
Allows you to rotate the image; you can  
select the number of degrees from the drop-  
down list.  
Using the Image Manager  
The Image Manager application provides you with menu  
commands and tools to edit your scanned image.  
Allows you to flip the image vertically or  
horizontally.  
Allows you to adjust the brightness or  
contrast of the image, or to invert the  
image.  
Use these tools to  
edit the image.  
Shows the properties of the image.  
For further details about the Image Manager application, refer  
to the onscreen help.  
29  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10Select Typical installation for a local printer and then  
click OK  
11After the installation is finished, click Quit.  
.
9
Using Your Printer with  
a Macintosh  
NOTE  
:
Your printer supports Macintosh systems with a built-in USB  
interface or 10/100 Base-TX network interface card. When you  
print a file from a Macintosh computer, you can use the driver by  
installing the PPD file.  
• If you have installed scan driver, click Restart  
• After the installation is finished, see “Setting Up the Printer”  
.
NOTE: Some printers do not support a network  
interface. Ensure that your printer supports a network  
interface by referring to Printer Specifications in your  
Printer User’s Guide.  
Uninstalling software  
Uninstall is required if you are upgrading the software, or if  
installation fails.  
This chapter includes:  
1
2
3
Ensure that you connect your printer to the computer. Turn  
on your computer and printer.  
Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD which came with your  
printer into the computer’s optical drive.  
Double-click CD icon that appears on your Macintosh  
desktop.  
4
5
6
7
8
9
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.  
Double-click the Installer OS X icon.  
Enter the password and click OK  
The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue  
Select Uninstall and click Uninstall  
The message which warns all application will close on your  
computer appears, Click Continue  
10When the uninstallation is done, click Quit.  
.
Installing Software  
.
The Drivers and Utilities CD that came with your printer  
provides you with the PPD file that allows you to use the CUPS  
driver or Apple LaserWriter driver (only available when you  
use a printer which supports the PostScript driver), for  
printing on a Macintosh computer.  
.
Also, it provides you with the Twain driver for scanning on a  
Macintosh computer.  
1
2
3
Ensure that you connect your printer to the computer. Turn  
on your computer and printer.  
Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD which came with your  
printer into the computer’s optical drive.  
Double-click CD icon that appears on your Macintosh  
desktop.  
4
5
6
7
8
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.  
Double-click the Installer OS X icon.  
Enter the password and click OK  
The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue  
Select Easy Install and click Install Easy Install is  
.
.
recommended for most users. All components necessary  
for printer operations will be installed.  
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual  
components to install.  
9
The message which warns all application will close on your  
computer appears, Click Continue  
.
30  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
For a USB-connected  
Setting Up the Printer  
1
Follow the instructions on “Installing Software” on page 30  
to install the PPD file on your computer.  
Set up for your printer will be different depending on which  
cable you use to connect the printer to your computer—the  
network cable or the USB cable.  
2
Open the Applications folder  
Setup Utility  
For MAC OS 10.5, open System Preferences from the  
Utilities, and Print  
.
Applications folder, and click Printer & Fax  
Click Add on the Printer List  
For MAC OS 10.5, press the “  
.
For a Network-connected Macintosh  
3
4
.
+
” icon then a display  
NOTE Some printers do not support a network interface.  
:
window will pop up.  
Before connecting your printer, ensure that your printer  
supports a network interface by referring to Printer  
Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.  
For MAC OS 10.3, select the USB tab.  
For MAC OS 10.4, click Default Browser and find the  
USB connection.  
For MAC OS 10.5, click Default and find the USB  
1
2
Follow the instructions on “Installing Software” on page 30  
to install the PPD file on your computer.  
connection.  
5
6
Select your printer name.  
Open the Applications folder  
Setup Utility  
For MAC OS 10.5, open System Preferences from the  
Utilities, and Print  
.
For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly,  
select Dell in Printer Model and your printer name in  
Model Name  
.
Applications folder, and click Printer & Fax  
Click Add on the Printer List  
For MAC OS 10.5, press the “  
.
For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly,  
select Dell in Print Using and your printer name in  
Model  
3
4
.
+
” icon then a display  
.
window will pop up.  
For MAC OS 10.5, if Auto Select does not work properly,  
For MAC OS 10.3, select the Rendezvous tab.  
select Select a driver to use... and your printer name  
in Print Using  
.
For MAC OS 10.4, click Default Browser and find the  
Bonjour  
For MAC OS 10.5, click Default and find the Bonjour  
Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the  
default printer.  
.
.
7
Click Add.  
The name of your machine appears on the list. Select  
DELL000xxxxxxxxx from the printer box, where the  
xxxxxxxxx varies depending on your machine.  
5
For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly,  
select Dell in Printer Model and your printer name in  
Model Name  
.
For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly,  
select Dell in Print Using and your printer name in  
Model  
.
For MAC OS 10.5, if Auto Select does not work properly,  
select Select a driver to use... and your printer name  
in Print Using  
.
Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the  
default printer.  
6
Click Add.  
31  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Changing Printer Settings  
You can use advanced printing features when using your  
printer.  
Printing  
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the File  
menu. The printer name which appears in the printer properties  
window may differ depending on the printer in use. Except for  
the name, the composition of the printer properties window is  
similar.  
NOTES  
:
• The Macintosh printer’s properties window that appears in  
this User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
However the composition of the printer properties window is  
similar.  
• You can check your printer name in the supplied  
Drivers and Utilities CD.  
NOTES: The setting options may differ depending on printers  
and Macintosh OS version.  
Layout  
Printing a Document  
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document  
appears on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on  
one sheet of paper. Select Layout from the Presets drop-down  
list to access the following features.  
When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer  
software setting in each application you use. Follow these steps  
to print from a Macintosh.  
1
2
3
Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want  
to print.  
Open the File menu and click Page Setup  
Setup in some applications).  
(Document  
Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, and other  
options and click OK  
.
Make sure that your  
printer is selected.  
Mac OS 10.5  
Pages per Sheet: This feature determines how many  
pages printed on one page. For details, see "Printing  
Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper" on the next  
column.  
Layout Direction: You can select the printing direction  
on a page as like the examples on UI.  
Mac OS 10.5  
4
5
Open the File menu and click Print.  
Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which  
pages you want to print.  
6
Click Print when you finish setting the options.  
32  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Graphics  
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet  
of Paper  
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper.  
This feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.  
The Graphics tab provides options for selecting Quality and  
Color Mode. Select Graphics form the Presets' drop-down  
list to access the graphic features.  
1
2
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the  
File menu.  
Select Layout  
.
Mac OS 10.5  
Quality: You can select the printing resolution. The  
higher the setting, the sharper the clarity of printed  
characters and graphics. The higher setting also may  
increase the time it takes to print a document.  
Mac OS 10.5  
Color Mode: You can set the color options. Setting to  
Color typically produces the best possible print quality  
for color documents. If you want to print a color  
3
4
Select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet  
of paper on the Pages per Sheet drop-down list.  
document in grayscale, select Grayscale  
.
Select the page order from the Layout Direction option.  
Paper  
To print a border around each page on the sheet, select  
the option you want from the Border drop-down list.  
Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray  
from which you want to print. This will let you get the best  
quality printout. If you load a different type of print material,  
select the corresponding paper type.  
5
Click Print, and the printer prints the selected number of  
pages on one side of each page.  
Mac OS 10.5  
33  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Scanning  
You can scan docoments using Image Capture program.  
Macintosh OS offers Image Capture program.  
Scanning with USB  
1
2
3
Ensure that your machine and computer are turned on and  
properly connected to each other.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
OR load the document(s) face up into the ADF (or DADF).  
Start Applications and click Image Capture  
.
NOTE: If No Image Capture device connected message  
appears, disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. If the  
problem persists, please refer to the Image Capture’s help.  
4
5
Set the scan options on this program.  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
NOTE  
:
• For more information about using Image Capture, please  
refer to the Image Capture’s help.  
• If you want to scan via the DADF, use TWAIN-comliant  
softwares.  
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant softwares, such as  
Adobe® Photoshop®.  
• Scan process differ according to TWAIN-compliant  
softwares. Please refer to the user’s guide of the software.  
• If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update  
Mac OS to the latest version. Image Capture operates  
propery in Mac OS X 10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS X 10.4.7  
or higher.  
34  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SOFTWARE SECTION  
INDEX  
A
L
P
advanced printing, use 10  
Layout properties, set  
Paper properties, set  
Windows  
Linux  
paper size, set  
paper source, set  
Windows  
poster, print 11  
PostScript driver  
installing 15  
print  
B
driver, install 22  
paper size, set  
print 27  
paper type, set  
print 27  
printer properties 26  
printing 27  
resolution  
printing 27  
scanning 28  
booklet printing 11  
C
document  
fit to page 12  
canceling  
scan 19  
Color  
from Windows  
N-up  
overlay 14  
D
document, print  
Macintosh 32  
PRN  
Windows  
double-sided printing 12  
M
Macintosh  
driver  
printer driver, install  
Linux 22  
printer properties  
Linux 27  
Macintosh 32  
F
install 30, 31  
printing 32  
favorites settings, use  
MFP driver, install  
Linux 22  
G
Graphics  
Windows 5, 15  
printer resolution, set  
Windows  
printer software  
install  
Macintosh 30  
uninstall  
Macintosh 30  
printing  
N
H
n-up printing  
Macintosh 33  
Windows 10  
help, use 9, 15  
booklets 11  
double-sided 12  
from Linux 27  
I
install  
O
printer driver  
orientation, print  
Macintosh 30, 31  
Windows  
overlay  
installing  
S
Linux software 22  
scanning  
Linux 28  
create 14  
delete 14  
print 14  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WIA driver 19  
scanning from Macintosh 34  
setting  
advanced option  
color mode  
darkness  
favorites  
resolution  
Windows  
software  
install  
Macintosh 30, 31  
system requirements  
Macintosh 30, 31  
uninstall  
Macintosh 30  
T
TWAIN, scan 19  
U
uninstall, software  
Macintosh 30  
uninstalling  
MFP driver  
Using 13  
W
watermark  
create 13  
delete 13  
edit 13  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Continental Electric Rice Cooker CE23291 User Manual
Crown Audio Music Mixer 160MA User Manual
Cuisinart Gas Grill CGG 240 User Manual
Dell All in One Printer 5130CDN User Manual
Desa Water Heater CBN20T User Manual
Digicom Network Card USB Wave 54 User Manual
Dukane Projector 8958A User Manual
Electro Voice Speaker DMS 1122 85 User Manual
Electro Voice Speaker System HP66 User Manual
Garmin Fish Finder 90 140 User Manual